Download - Guimn_e-surpass Hit 7070 3.2
s
Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 Copyright (C) Siemens AG 2006 Issued by Communications Group Hofmannstraße 51 D-81359 München Technical modifications possible. Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 i
1.1 Abbreviations ......................................................................................1
2 Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070 13
2.1 Using this Help System.....................................................................13 2.2 SURPASS hiT 7070 Features ..........................................................14 2.3 About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software ................................................15
3 General 17
3.1 Date / Time Configuration .................................................................17 3.2 Network Element Configuration ........................................................18 3.3 Module View, Double-row Subrack...................................................20 3.4 Module View, Single-row Subrack ....................................................24 3.5 Option Settings .................................................................................28 3.6 EOW Configurations .........................................................................30 3.7 Neighbour Ports ................................................................................31 3.8 Script Configuration ..........................................................................32
4 Extension Shelf 37
4.1 Extension Shelf Configuration ..........................................................37 4.2 ESM-CORE Card Configuration .......................................................38
5 Subrack Equipping 39
5.1 Possible Equipping Information ........................................................39 5.2 Actual Equipping Information............................................................40 5.3 Card Inventory Summary..................................................................41 5.4 Protection Shelf Number Config .......................................................42
6 Card Label Information 43
6.1 SDH or Ethernet Interfaces Card Label Information.........................43 6.2 PDH Cards Label Information...........................................................44 6.3 IFO155M-E Card Label Information..................................................45 6.4 SCOH Card Label Information..........................................................46 6.5 IF2M Card Label Information ............................................................47 6.6 IFS40G-MX Card Label Information .................................................48 6.7 Booster Cards Label Information ......................................................49
7 Card Configuration 51
7.1 Card Equipment Configuration .........................................................51 7.2 SCOH Card Configuration ................................................................52 7.3 CLU Card Configuration....................................................................53 7.4 SF160G Card Configuration .............................................................54 7.5 SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration...............................................55 7.6 SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack......................57 7.7 IF2M / IF345M Card Configuration ...................................................58 7.8 Card Configuration for SDH Cards ...................................................60 7.9 IFS40G-MX Card Configuration........................................................61 7.10 Card Configuration for ETH Cards....................................................62 7.11 IFSO* Cards Configuration ...............................................................64 7.12 Port Provisioning Configuration ........................................................65 7.13 IF2M - Port Provisioning Config........................................................66
8 Timing 69
8.1 Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration ..................................69 8.2 T0 Configuration ...............................................................................72 8.3 T1 Configuration ...............................................................................73 8.4 T3 Configuration ...............................................................................75 8.5 T4 Configuration ...............................................................................77
9 Alarms 79
9.1 Alarm List ..........................................................................................79
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
ii A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
9.2 NEAP Configuration..........................................................................83 9.3 Equipment Alarms.............................................................................84 9.4 Communication Alarms.....................................................................86 9.5 Communication Alarm Feature Table ...............................................88 9.6 E3/VC3 Alarms .................................................................................93 9.7 1:N MSP Alarms ...............................................................................95 9.8 TIF Configuration ..............................................................................97 9.9 TCA List ............................................................................................98
10 Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows 101 10.1 STM-1 Traffic Flow..........................................................................101 10.2 STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection .............................................................102 10.3 STM-4 Traffic Flow..........................................................................103 10.4 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection ...........................................................104 10.5 STM-16 Traffic Flow........................................................................105 10.6 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection ...........................................................106 10.7 STM-64 Traffic Flow........................................................................107 10.8 ETH Traffic Flow .............................................................................108 10.9 E12 or E3 Traffic Flow ....................................................................109 10.10 VC4 Configuration ......................................................................110 10.11 VC4 Selection .............................................................................113 10.12 VC4 Static Multiplex Traffic Flow................................................114
11 Protection Traffic Flow 115 11.1 1:N MSP Protected Traffic Flow .....................................................115 11.2 1:N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow .................................................116 11.3 STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow.................................................117 11.4 STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow.................................................118 11.5 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow..........................................................119 11.6 STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow..........................................................120 11.7 STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ...............................121 11.8 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ...............................122 11.9 STM-1 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow...........................................................123 11.10 STM-4 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow ......................................................124 11.11 STM-16 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow ....................................................125 11.12 STM-64 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow ....................................................126 11.13 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ...............................127 11.14 STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow .....................................128 11.15 STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow..................129 11.16 STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ...............................130 11.17 STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow .....................................131 11.18 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow..................132 11.19 4F SPRING Traffic Flow .............................................................133
12 Protection Selection Windows 135
12.1 VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards ......................................135
13 Traffic Configuration 137 13.1 Port Configuration ...........................................................................137 13.2 Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards...............................................139 13.3 STM-N Configuration ......................................................................142 13.4 AU4/VC4 Configuration...................................................................146 13.5 VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP ........................................................148 13.6 VC3/VC12 Configuration TTP.........................................................150 13.7 ETH Configuration ..........................................................................153 13.8 E12 Configuration ...........................................................................156 13.9 E3 Configuration .............................................................................158 13.10 IFSOA – Config ..........................................................................159
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 iii
14 Multiplex Structure 161
14.1 VC4 Multiplex Structure ..................................................................161
15 Cross Connections 163 15.1 Cross Connections List ...................................................................163 15.2 Plain Cross Connections List ..........................................................166 15.3 Add Cross Connection ....................................................................168 15.4 Cross Connection Details ...............................................................170 15.5 Cross Connections Graphic ............................................................171 15.6 Cross Connection Graphic Details..................................................173 15.7 Modify Cross Connection................................................................174 15.8 Overhead Cross Connections.........................................................175
16 Protection Management 179 16.1 Protection Management..................................................................179
17 1 plus 1 MSP Protection 181
17.1 STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration ......................................................181
18 1 to 1 MSP Protection 183
18.1 1:1 MSP Configuration....................................................................183
19 1 to N MSP Protection 185 19.1 1:N MSP Configuration ...................................................................185 19.2 Add 1:N MSP ..................................................................................188 19.3 1:N MSP Extension.........................................................................189 19.4 Add Working Ports ..........................................................................190 19.5 Working STM-1 Selection ...............................................................191 19.6 Working VC4 Selection ...................................................................192
20 2F/4F-SPRING Protection 193
20.1 2F SPRING Configuration...............................................................193 20.2 2F-SPRING Extra Configuration.....................................................196 20.3 4F SPRING Configuration...............................................................199 20.4 2F / 4F SPRING Topology Configuration .......................................202 20.5 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration .........................................204 20.6 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING ......................205 20.7 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING......................................206 20.8 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra ............................207 20.9 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING......................................208 20.10 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING..................209 20.11 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING..................................210 20.12 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra ........................211 20.13 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING..................................212 20.14 <2F or 4F> Spring or Spring X Nut Config .................................213 20.15 4F-Spring X Config .....................................................................214
21 Link Protection 217
21.1 Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow............................................217 21.2 Extension Link Protection Configuration.........................................218 21.3 Add Extension Link Protection........................................................219 21.4 ISTM 4 Configuration ......................................................................221 21.5 ESM ISTM 4 Configuration .............................................................222
22 Concatenations 223
22.1 VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection.....................................................223 22.2 Virtual 2x VC3 Selection .................................................................224 22.3 Virtual 4x VC4 Selection .................................................................225 22.4 Virtual 7x VC4 Selection .................................................................226
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
iv A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
22.5 Virtual 16x VC4 Selection ...............................................................227 22.6 Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection .......................................................228 22.7 Concatenated VC4 Configuration ...................................................229 22.8 VC12-2v Configuration....................................................................232 22.9 VC3-2v Configuration......................................................................233 22.10 Concatenation Configuration ......................................................234 22.11 Concatenation Details ................................................................237 22.12 Add Concatenation Group ..........................................................238 22.13 Concatenation Group Templates................................................239 22.14 Modify Template .........................................................................240 22.15 VCLO-Concatenation Configuration...........................................241
23 VLAN 243
23.1 VLAN Functionality .........................................................................243 23.2 VLAN C Traffic Flow .......................................................................246 23.3 VLAN Selection...............................................................................248 23.4 VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment.....................................................249 23.5 Mixed Mode GFP Assignment ........................................................252 23.6 Assigned VLAN IDs Information .....................................................255 23.7 Add VLAN ID Assignment...............................................................256
24 Virtual VCs 257
24.1 Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection .........................................................257 24.2 Virtual VC12 Configuration .............................................................258 24.3 Virtual VC3 Configuration ...............................................................261 24.4 Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration .......................................................264
25 GFP Configurations 267
25.1 GFP Group Traffic Flow..................................................................267 25.2 GFP Group Subview .......................................................................269 25.3 GFP Assignment.............................................................................270 25.4 PF2G5 GFP Assignment ................................................................272 25.5 PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration............................274 25.6 PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration ............................276 25.7 PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration ............................277 25.8 PF2G5 Add CUG ............................................................................278 25.9 SDH GFP Assignment ....................................................................280
26 LCAS 283 26.1 LCAS State Configuration...............................................................283 26.2 Modify LCAS Concatenation Group................................................285 26.3 LCAS VC3-nv Configuration ...........................................................286 26.4 LCAS VC12-nv Configuration .........................................................287 26.5 LCAS VC3-nv Virtual VC3 Selection ..............................................288 26.6 LCAS VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection ..........................................289 26.7 LCAS Virtual VC3 Configuration.....................................................290 26.8 LCAS Virtual VC12 Configuration...................................................293
27 MCF General 297
27.1 Message Communication Functions...............................................297 27.2 MCF Stack Parameters Configuration ............................................298 27.3 MCF Transport Connection Information .........................................300 27.4 MCF Transport Connection Performance.......................................302
28 MCF CLNS 303
28.1 MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information ......................................303 28.2 MCF CLNS Performance................................................................305
29 MCF DCC 309
29.1 MCF DCC Configuration .................................................................309
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 v
29.2 MCF DCC Linkage Configuration ...................................................311 29.3 MCF DCC Linkage Performance ....................................................313 29.4 Adding a Reachable DCC Address ................................................315 29.5 Modifying a Reachable DCC Address ............................................317 29.6 Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections ..................318
30 MCF Ethernet 319
30.1 MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration .............................................319 30.2 MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance ..............................................321 30.3 Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address...........................................323 30.4 Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address ......................................325
31 MCF OSI/IP 327
31.1 MCF IP over OSI Configuration ......................................................327 31.2 MCF OSI over IP Configuration ......................................................328 31.3 MCF OSI over IP Performance.......................................................330 31.4 MCF OSI over IP, Adding a Reachable Address............................332 31.5 MCF OSI over IP, Modifying a Reachable Address .......................334
32 IP Settings 335
32.1 IP Addresses Configuration ............................................................335 32.2 IP Addresses Entry Modify..............................................................338 32.3 IP Static Routing Configuration.......................................................339 32.4 IP Static Routing Entry Add ............................................................341 32.5 IP Static Routing Entry Modify ........................................................342
33 OSPF Settings 343
33.1 OSPF Configuration........................................................................343 33.2 OSPF Areas Configuration .............................................................345 33.3 OSPF Areas Entry Modify...............................................................347 33.4 OSPF Area Metric Configuration ....................................................348 33.5 OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration............................................349 33.6 OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add .................................................351 33.7 OSPF Interfaces Configuration.......................................................352 33.8 OSPF Interfaces Entry Add.............................................................354 33.9 OSPF Interface Metric Configuration..............................................356 33.10 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration .......................................357 33.11 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add.............................................359 33.12 OSPF Neighbours Information ...................................................360 33.13 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information ........................................362 33.14 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details......................................364 33.15 OSPF LSDB Information ............................................................365 33.16 OSPF LSDB Entry Details ..........................................................367 33.17 OSPF External LSDB Information ..............................................368 33.18 OSPF External LSDB Entry Details............................................370
34 TCP Settings 371 34.1 TCP Connections Information.........................................................371 34.2 TCP Connections Entry Details ......................................................373
35 Data 375 35.1 Subrack Data ..................................................................................375 35.2 ASIC Data Information ....................................................................376 35.3 Copy Data .......................................................................................377 35.4 Copy Card Data ..............................................................................379 35.5 DB Management Configuration ......................................................380 35.6 DB Download Dialog.......................................................................382 35.7 DB Upload Dialog ...........................................................................383 35.8 NE Logs Information .......................................................................384 35.9 Log Records Attribute .....................................................................385
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
vi A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
35.10 Copy to Permanent MACs..........................................................386
36 Performance 387
36.1 Ethernet Packet Performance.........................................................387 36.2 AU4 PJE Performance....................................................................390 36.3 STM-64 Gauge Performance..........................................................392 36.4 MSTTP Near End Performance......................................................395 36.5 MSTTP Far End Performance ........................................................399 36.6 RSTTP Near End Performance ......................................................403 36.7 VCCTP Near End Performance......................................................407 36.8 VCCTP Far End Performance ........................................................411 36.9 VCTTP Near End Performance ......................................................415 36.10 VCTTP Far End Performance ....................................................419 36.11 VC12 Near End Performance.....................................................423 36.12 VC12 Far End Performance .......................................................427 36.13 GFP Frames Performance .........................................................431
37 IF7FE2GEL2 card 433 37.1 IF7FE2GEL2 - System Config ........................................................433 37.2 IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry add........................................................453 37.3 IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry Modify ...................................................455 37.4 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Add .........................................457 37.5 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Modify .....................................458 37.6 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Config .............................................460 37.7 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Add ........................................463 37.8 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Modify....................................464 37.9 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Config ...........................................465 37.10 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Add .................................468 37.11 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Modify .............................469 37.12 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port config ..........................................................470 37.13 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Management Config ...................................472 37.14 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Statistics Information ..................................486 37.15 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Configuration..............................................489 37.16 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Add ...................................................491 37.17 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Modify ...............................................492 37.18 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Statistics Information..................................493 37.19 IF7FE2GEL2 - Group Config ......................................................495 37.20 IF7FE2GEL2 - Groups Queue Entry Config...............................497 37.21 IF7FE2GEL2 - Trap info .............................................................498 37.22 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Config ..............................................502 37.23 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Details ....................................504 37.24 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Modify ....................................507 37.25 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Statistics Info ...................................510 37.26 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Debug ....................................512 37.27 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Config.......................................................515 37.28 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Permanent Entry Add ..............................516 37.29 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Modify.............................................518 37.30 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Details ............................................520 37.31 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Statistics Info ...........................................521 37.32 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Info .......................................522 37.33 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details ..................................524 37.34 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Config ........................................526 37.35 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Entry Add...................................528 37.36 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Ethernet Statistics Info ...........................529 37.37 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details ..................................532
38 RPR 535
38.1 RPR Switch Configuration ..............................................................535 38.2 RPR Ring Performance ..................................................................538 38.3 RPR Feeder Performance ..............................................................541
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 vii
38.4 Adding a Permanent Entry..............................................................544
39 Security 545
39.1 Access Information .........................................................................545 39.2 NMS NE Password .........................................................................546 39.3 Change Password to Default ..........................................................547
40 Software 549
40.1 Software Management....................................................................549 40.2 Software Download.........................................................................551 40.3 Delta Software Download ...............................................................552 40.4 Active APS Record .........................................................................553 40.5 APS Compatibility Information ........................................................554
41 Fault Clearance 555
41.1 NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance.................................555 41.2 Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance ..........................................557 41.3 Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance .......................................561 41.4 Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance ...............................................566 41.5 SCOH and CLU Card Fault Clearance ...........................................569 41.6 TIF Fault Clearance ........................................................................572 41.7 Fan Unit Fault Clearance ................................................................573
42 How to... (General Tasks) 575
42.1 How to Configure NSAP Settings ...................................................575 42.2 How to Configure the Subrack Equipping.......................................576 42.3 How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards ......................................577 42.4 How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports ..........................................578 42.5 How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object 579 42.6 How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object ...............580 42.7 How to Configure ETH Cards and Debugging................................581
43 How to... (Timing) 583
43.1 How to Configure the Timing ..........................................................583 43.2 How to Set Sync Priorities ..............................................................585
44 How to... (Alarms) 587
44.1 How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling ................................587 44.2 How to Suppress Alarms ................................................................588 44.3 How to Configure TIF Ports ............................................................589
45 How to... (Cross Connections) 591 45.1 How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Filter Options ....................591 45.2 How to Create a Cross Connection ................................................592 45.3 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection...................593 45.4 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection.....................594 45.5 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection.....................595 45.6 How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12/VC3 Cross Connection ...........596 45.7 How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR 597 45.8 How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection.............................598 45.9 How to Add and Remove Path Protections ....................................599 45.10 How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection ............................600 45.11 How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection...........................601 45.12 How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection ...........602 45.13 How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection..................603 45.14 How to Disconnect a Cross Connection.....................................604 45.15 How to Configure DCC Cross Connections ...............................605
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
viii A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
46 How to... (OH Cross Connections) 607
46.1 How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection Filter Options..............607 46.2 How to Create an OH Cross Connection........................................608 46.3 How to Disconnect an OH Cross Connection.................................609
47 How to... (Protections) 611
47.1 How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line Protection .......................611 47.2 How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection..........................612 47.3 How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection..........................613 47.4 How to Configure the Squelch Table for 2F or 4F Rings................614 47.5 How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection ...........................615 47.6 How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection .......................617 47.7 How to Create / Delete an SF2G5, SF10G or SF160G Card Protection 618 47.8 How to Configure RPR Protection ..................................................619 47.9 How to Create an SNCP Protection................................................620 47.10 How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Existing LO Path...........621 47.11 How to Set Up the Squelching Table .........................................623 47.12 How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link ...............................625
48 How to... (Concatenations) 627 48.1 How to Configure SDH Concatenations .........................................627 48.2 How to Configure ETH Concatenations..........................................628
49 How to... (GFP Configurations) 629
49.1 How to Create / Delete VC Channels .............................................629 49.2 How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups....................................630 49.3 How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel .........................631 49.4 How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG..........................................632 49.5 How to Specify the CUG Service Class..........................................634 49.6 How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic ........635 49.7 How to Configure RPR Bandwidths................................................636
50 How to... (Data and Software Handling) 637 50.1 How to Download VCDB Files ........................................................637 50.2 How to Upload VCDB Files.............................................................638
51 How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules) 639 51.1 How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH ...................................639 51.2 How to Change a Defective SCOH.................................................640 51.3 How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC.....643 51.4 How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH.................646 51.5 Retrieve NSAP and VCDB..............................................................649 51.6 Flow Chart Symbol Legend.............................................................650
52 Index 651
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 1
1.1 Abbreviations
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
AFI Authority and Format Identifier
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
AK TPDU Acknowledge Transport Protocol Data Unit
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
APD Avalanche Photo Diode
APS Automatic Protection Switching / Application Program Switching
AS Alarm Suppression
ASBR Autonomous System Border Router
ASCII American Standard for Information Interchange
ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notification One (ITU X.208)
ASW Application SoftWare
AU Administrative Unit
AU4 Administrative Unit for VC-4
AUI Attachment Unit Interface
AUX Auxiliary channel
BASW BAsic SoftWare
BBE Background Block Error
BDM Background Debug Mode interface
BER Bit Error Ratio
CC Cross Connect / Cross Connection
CD Collision Detection
CE Communauté Européenne
CF Card Failure
CFG Configuration
CH Channel
CL Configuration Log
CLNS ConnectionLess Network layer Service
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
2 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
CLR Clear
CLU Central Clock Unit
CP Connection Protection
CPL Current Problem List
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRS Card Release State
CS4 Connection Switch 4xSTM-1
CSO Card Switch Off
CT Card Type
CTP Connection Termination Point
CUG Closed User Group
DB Data Base
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communication Channel
DCCB Data Communication Channel Bus
DCCM DCC bytes D4 to D12 (Multiplex section)
DCCR DCC bytes D1 to D3 (Regenerator section)
DCM Dispersion Compensation Module
DCN Data Communication Network
DEC Decimal
DEMUX Demultiplexer
DL Data Link
DNU Do Not Use
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
DSP Domain Specific Part
E4 Electrical interface signal
EBC Error Block Count
ECC Embedded Communication Channel
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 3
ECCM ECC for Multiplex section
ECCR ECC for Regeneration section
EDI Equipment Defect Indication / Electronic Data Interchange
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EM Element Manager
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
EPS Equipment Protection Switch
ES Electrical Section / Errored Second(s)
ESD ElectroStatic Discharge
ESM-Core Provides optical 622 Mbit/s link to main shelf
ETS European Telecommunication Standard
ETH Ethernet
ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute
EXC Excessive bit error rate
F Standardized interface for connection of the operating terminal
FAA Fan Alarm Adapter
FAS Frame Alignment Signal
FC/PC Connector type
FE Far End
FEBE Far End Block Error
FEC Forward Error Correction
FEPROM Flash Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
FERF Far End Receive Failure
FG Functional Group
FIFO First In First Out
FM Fault Management
FO Fiber Optic
FOD Fiber Optic Distributor
FOP Failure of (MSP) Protocol
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
4 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
FOT Fail of Topology
FTA File Transfer Area
FTP File Transfer Protocol
FU Functional Unit
FW Firmware
GDMO Guidelines for the Definition of Managed Objects (ITU X.722)
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
GMT Greenwich Mean Time
GTP Group Termination Point
GUI Graphical User Interface
HW HardWare
HEL Historical Event Log
HEX Hexadecimal
HO Higher Order
ICB Internal Control Bus
ICS Internal Communication System
ICU Internal Control Unit
ID Identification
IDI Initial Domain Identifier
IDP Initial Domain Part
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IF Interface
IF2M Electrical E1 interface card, 63 x 2 Mbit/s
IF345M PDH Interface 34/45 Mbit/s
IFO155M Optical STM-1 card, Octuple 155 Mbit/s
IFO155M-E Electrical STM-1 card, Octuple 155 Mbit/s
IFOFE Optical Octuple Fast Ethernet card
IFOFE-E Electrical Octuple Fast Ethernet card, VC-4 or VC-3
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 5
IFOFES-E Electrical Octuple Fast Ethernet card, VC-3 or VC12
IFQ2G5, IFQ2G5B Optical STM-16 card, Quad 2.5 Gbit/s, SFP
IFQ622M Optical STM-4 card, Quad 622 Mbit/s, SFP
IFQGBE Optical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card
IFQGBE-E Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card
IFQGBEB Optical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card; provides VLAN concentrator functionality
IFQGBEB-E Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card; provides VLAN concentrator functionality
IFQGBE-E Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet Card
IFS10G, IFS10GB Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s
IFS10G-M Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for Metro WDM
IFS10G-R Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for Regio WDM
IFS10G-WLS Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for WLS WDM purposes
IFS2G5 Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s
IFS2G5B Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s, SFP
IFS40G-MX Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Card, 4 x 10 Gbit/s to 40 Gbit/s
IFSOA Interface Single Optical Amplifier
IFSOA-PDC Interface Single Optical Amplifier-PDC
IFSOB Interface Single Optical Booster
IFSOB-PDC Interface Single Optical Booster-PDC
IMN Installation Manual
IMTS Internal Multiplex Timing Source
INT Internal Supervision
I/O Input/Output
IP Internet Protocol
IS Intermediate System
ISDH Internal SDH Signal
ISF ISDH Signal Fail
ISO International Standards Organization
ISTM Internal Synchronous Transport Module
ISU ISDH Switch Layer Unit
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
6 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
ITMN Installation and Test Manual
ITU International Telecommunication Union
K1, K2 Automatic Protection Switching
KBUS K-byte BUS for MSP Control
LAN Local Area Network
LAPD Link Access Procedure on D Channel
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT Local Craft Terminal
LED Light Emitting Diode
LNQ622M PDH Extension Link Card
LO Lower Order
LO SF Lower Order Switching Fabric
LOF Loss of Frame
LOL Loss of Lock
LOM Loss of Marker
LOP Loss of Pointer
LOS Loss of Signal
LSDB Link State Data Base
LSU Line Switching Unit
LT Line Termination
LT0 Loss of T0 clock
LTI Loss of Timing Source Incoming (T1, T3)
LTS Loss of Timing Source
MAC Media Access Control
MACAT Media Access Control Address Table
MCF Message Communication Functions
MDI Multiple Document Interface
MIB Management Information Base
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 7
MIBS Management Information Base of Synchronous Multiplexer
MIS-PT Mismatch Path Trace
MIS-RT Mismatch Regenerator Trace
MMC Multimedia Card
MMI Man Machine Interface
MS Multiplex Section
MSAIS Multiplex Section Alarm Indication
MSFERF Multiplex Section Far End Receive Failure
MSOH Multiplex Section Overhead
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MSPCO Multiplexer Section Path Connection
MSPTF Multiplexer Section Protection Function
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
MTS Multiplexer Timing Source
MTTR Mean Time to Repair
NC/P Network Connection Protection
NCT Network Craft Terminal
NE Network Element
NEC Network Element Controller
NEAP Network Element Alarm Panel
NMS Network Management System
NPDU Network Protocol Data Unit
NRZ Non Return to Zero
NRZI Non Return to Zero Invert
NSAP Network Service Access Point
OAS Optical Amplifier Section
OGL Operator Guidelines
OH Overhead
OHCC Overhead Cross Connections
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
8 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
OHF Overhead Functions
OH-IF Overhead Interface
OGL Operator Guidelines
OOF Out of Frame
OS Optical Section
OSNR Optical Signal/Noise Ratio
OSPF Open Shortest Path First (IP Protocol)
P4 Plesiochronous Digital Signal
P Protection
PCS Plesiochronous Connection Supervision
PCU Peripheral Control Unit
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDU Protocol Data Unit
PET Possible Equipping Table
PF2G5 Packet Switch Fabric Card
PJE Pointer Justification Event
PLL Phase Locked Loop
PLM Payload Mismatch
PLP Packet Level Protection
PM Performance Management or Performance Monitoring
POH Path Overhead
POM Path Overhead Monitoring
PP Path Protection
PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence
PRC Primary Reference Clock
PROM Programmable Read-Only Memory
PSE Path Switching Event
PSU Power Supply Unit
PTI Path Trace Identifier
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 9
Q Interface to a Telecommunication Management Network
Q-B3 Q-Interface to Operations System via Ethernet-LAN
QECC Q-Interface via DCC
Q-F Standardized Interface for Connection of the Operating Terminal
QOS Quality of Service
QST-B3 QD2-Interface to LCT
Qx Interface to a Telecommunication Management Network
RAM Random Access Memory
RAP Reachable Address Prefix
RD Read
RDI Remote Defect Indication
REI Remote Error Indication
RFI Remote Failure Indication
RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer
RL Remote Loop
RLC Remote Loop Control
ROM Read-Only Memory
RPR Resilient Packet Ring
RS Regenerator Section
RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead
RTC Real Time Clock
RTI Regenerator Trace Identifier
Rx Receiver
SC Connector Type
SCOH Central Controller Card
SD Signal Degraded
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDI Service and Diagnostic Interface
SEC Synchronous Equipment Clock
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
10 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SES Severely Errored Second(s)
SET2 Synchronous Equipment Timing
SETG Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator
SETS Functional Group "Synchronous Equipment Timing Source"
SF Signal Fail
SF160G Central VC-4 Switch Card
SF2G5 Low Order VC-3 / VC-12 Switch Card
SF10G Low Order VC-3 / VC-12 Switch Card
SFP Small Form factor Pluggable (pluggable optical module)
SNCP/I Sub-Network Connection Protection / Inherent Monitoring
SNCP/N Sub-Network Connection Protection / Non-intrusive Monitoring
SNPA Sub-Network Point of Attachment
SOH Section Overhead
SPO Spontaneous Alarm
SQM Sequence Mismatch
SSF Server Signal Fail
SSM Synchronization Status Message
SSU Synchronzation Supply Unit
STM-N Synchronous Transport Module Level N
SUG Supervisory Unequipped Generation
SUM Supervisory Unequipped Monitoring
SW Software
T0 System Clock
T1 Timing Reference Signal from Line Signal
T3 Input for External Clock Reference Signal
T4 Output for Clock Reference Signal
TCA Threshold Crossing Alarm
TCP Termination Connection Point
TxDeg Transmit Degraded
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 11
TED Technical Description
TxFail Transmission Fail
TIF Telemetry Interface
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
TMP Timestamp
TNMS Telecommunication Network Management System
TTI Trail Trace Identifier
TTP Trail Termination Point
TP Termination Point
TPDU Transport Protocol Data Unit
TSD Trail Signal Degrade
TSF Trail Signal Fail
TU Tributary Unit
TUG Tributary Unit Group
Tx Transmitter
TXDeg Transmit Degrade Signal
TXFAIL Transmit Failure
UAS Unavailable Second(s)
UAT Unavailable Time
UMN User Manual
UNEQ Unequipped
USI User Interface
UTIF Universal Transmission Internal Interface
VC Virtual Container
VC-n Virtual Container Level n
VCDB Variable Configuration Data Block
VCnTTP VCn Trail Termination Point
VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
12 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WLS WDM Longspan System
WR Write
WTR Wait to Restore time
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 13
2 Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070
2.1 Using this Help System
This help system provides information on the windows and menus of the SURPASS hiT 7070, repair actions after alarm messages, and selected task instructions ("How to ...").
Displaying help topics
In the Help menu, click Help Topics...
The SURPASS hiT 7070 Help window is displayed, giving you access to the table of contents, an index, and a full-text search function.
Displaying the help of the currently open window
Press the F1 key
or
Click the question mark button in the toolbar
or
in the Help menu, click On Window... F1.
Displaying information on the software
In the Help menu, click About...
Printing help windows
To start the printout click the print button in the toolbar.
In case of technical problems with the printout, print the identical help page out of the GUIMN manual.
Notes
Standard MS Windows functions and buttons are not described in this online help.
If there is a path stated at the top of the help window specifying how to find the corresponding SURPASS hiT 7070 window, that path should only be seen as an example. In many cases, there are also other ways to open the same SURPASS hiT 7070 window.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
14 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
2.2 SURPASS hiT 7070 Features
The SURPASS hiT 7070 is a comprehensive multi-service SDH multiplexer and cross-connect for universal use. The SURPASS hiT 7070 is configurable as
• TMX (terminal multiplexer),
• ADM (add/drop multiplexer), or
• small LXC (local cross-connect).
in multi-service access and edge network applications.
The network elements can be used in a straightforward way of creating point-to-point connections, linear chain configurations and ring configurations.
According to requirements, equipping for the following application scenarios is possible:
• Terminal-to-terminal topologies,
• Linear topologies with add/drop functions (chains),
• Feeder network functionalities.
The SURPASS hiT 7070 offers not only standard functions, but also a lot of additional sophisticated functions for fast and complex traffic transfer and enhanced protection features, such as:
• Ethernet access with 10BaseT, 100BaseTX, and 1000T interfaces,
• Interfaces for SDH traffic signals up to STM-64,
• Virtual concatenation,
• Contiguous concatenation,
• Single fiber operation with optical splitter,
• 2-fiber ring protection,
• 4-fiber ring protection,
• RPR functionalities,
• Closed User Groups (CUG),
• EOW functions,
• Support of VLAN,
• Support of logical ports,
• IP / OSI tunneling,
• etc.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 15
2.3 About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software
The complete Element Manager software (to be installed on the operating terminal) consists of the following components:
• Ethernet software as a software package of the used Ethernet hardware. (HW component with SW driver for the Ethernet card of the PC, Workstation, or Mainframe used. This driver is not part of the SURPASS hiT 7070 software pack-age.)
• The OSI Stack software consisting of LLC Driver and OSI Stack (Marben Stack) software,
• NE Proxy software,
• TNMS CT software,
• Java Virtual Machine software,
• SURPASS hiT 7070 software package (LCT or NCT).
[6243]
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 17
3 General
3.1 Date / Time Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> NE Time...
Opening this window causes a request apply of date and time of the NE. The received values are displayed in the Current NE Time field and are automatically updated each second, according to the internal clock source of the PC that is used as LCT/NCT.
Current NE Time
The current NE time can be changed by adjusting the PC-time in the system time setup of the MS Windows control panel.
Adjust NE Time to PC-GMT
The date and time values for the PC-GMT are given by the MS Windows system time settings. The date and time values are displayed in read only fields.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
18 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
3.2 Network Element Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Network Element...
The window is used to allocate user defined location name and application type.
Value Ranges:
Name 48 Bytes
Location 64 Bytes
Type
Displays the NE type.
Startup Info
Displays information about the latest NE startup.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 19
NE Unique HW Code
Comprising the NE serial number and family code.
Application Type
An application type name can be inserted.
Second Power Supply Monitoring
If this checkbox is set, the Second Power Supply Monitoring is activated.
PSE Switch For Whole NE
If this checkbox is set, the path protection switching event notification is sent in case of an activated SNCP. Its configuration is valid for all protected cross connections of the NE.
Persistency Time
In this field, you can make the time settings for alarm self-recognition.
Raise Time [0..30 s]
This is the minimum time for which an alarm must be in the raised state in order to be reported securely. The default raise time is 2 s.
Clear Time [1..30 s]
Specifies how long the alarm must be in the cleared state before it is reported as cleared. The default clear time is 10 s.
Log Overwrite
Specifies if the Exception Log and/or the Trace Log will be overwritten in case of overflow.
Fault
Enable/Disable the following abnormal conditions (as communication alarms with severity "Warning"): enabled laser shutdown, enabled port loopbacks, deactivated ALS on optical interface cards, active operator commands for timing configurations (T0 configuration, T4 configuration), active operator commands within protection schemes (1+1 MSP, 1:1 MSP, 1:N MSP, 2FSPRING, 4FSPRING, Microshelf extension traffic protection, 1:N card protection of IF2M/IF345M/IFO155M-E, RPR bypass protection)
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
20 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
3.3 Module View, Double-row Subrack
This window is accessible via its toolbar button
This window represents the physical appearance of the managed NE. Between the NE and Subrack fields the configurated Extension Shelf types (subrack type and subrack ID) are visible. It shows the slots and their (required) equipping. The Module View displays the current required equipping of the NE only. The current equipping is not regarded in this view.
The Module View window consists of the top window segment and the bottom window segment
Each part of the window contains a vertical scrollbar, if not all contents are visible.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 21
Top window segment
The top window segment contains different symbols for displaying the physical slots and the possibly equipped cards.
The NE symbol in the uppermost row is used to display and configure NE-wide settings. The symbol contains an alarm mask indicator (A).
Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the NE-wide settings.
If one or more microshelves are used, there are several subrack tabs to display and configure subrack-related settings: Subrack 1 is the double-core subrack, Subrack 2 and the following are the microshelves.
Adding or removing microshelf tabs from the Module View is possible via the Extension Shelf Config window.
The slot number symbols are used to configure the NE equipment.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
22 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Right-click the slot number and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.
The card symbol below each slot number symbol displays the current required equipping of the NE. The appearance of the card symbols depends on the equipment state.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 23
Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.
Bottom window segment
The bottom window segment provides the port list.
It shows the physical ports of a card, if the card symbol in the top window segment is selected (clicked).
Right-click the symbols, and in the context menu, click Subview... to open the Traffic Flow windows of these ports.
How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards
How to Configure the Equipping
How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH
How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 or SF160G Card Protection
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection
How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
24 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
3.4 Module View, Single-row Subrack
This window is accessible via the toolbar button
This window represents the physical appearance of the managed NE. Between the NE and Subrack fields the configurated Extension Shelf types (subrack type and subrack ID) are visible. It shows the slots and their (required) equipping. The Module View displays the current required equipping of the NE only. The current equipping is not regarded in this view.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 25
The Module View window consists of the top window segment and the bottom window segment
Each part of the window contains a vertical scrollbar, if not all contents are visible.
Top window segment
The top window segment contains different symbols for displaying the physical slots and the possibly equipped cards.
The NE symbol in the uppermost row is used to display and configure NE-wide settings. The symbol contains an alarm mask indicator (A).
Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the NE-wide settings.
If one or more microshelves are used, there are several subrack tabs to display and configure subrack-related settings: Subrack 1 is the single-core subrack, Subrack 2 and the following are the microshelves.
Adding or removing microshelf tabs from the Module View is possible via the Extension Shelf Config window.
The slot number symbols are used to configure the NE equipment.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
26 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Right-click the slot number and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.
The card symbol below each slot number symbol displays the current required equipping of the NE. The appearance of the card symbols depends on the equipment state.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 27
Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.
Bottom window segment
The bottom window segment provides the port list.
It shows the physical ports of a card, if the card symbol in the top window segment is selected (clicked).
Right-click the symbols, and in the context menu, click Subview... to open the Traffic Flow windows of these ports.
How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards
How to Configure the Equipping
How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH
How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection
How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 or SF160G Card Protection
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection
How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
28 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
3.5 Option Settings
This window is accessible via its toolbar button
In this window, you can preset the alarm severity threshold, the window that is opened at startup, the time zone frequency display, and several general options for your desktop.
Alarm Severity Threshold
Used to set the threshold for alarm display. Alarms with severities above and equal to the threshold are included in the alarm summary displayed in the cards. Alarms with severities below the configured threshold are excluded from the alarm summary displayed in the cards.
For example, if critical is selected, only critical alarms are indicated in the cards. If major is selected, critical and major alarms are displayed.
By default, the threshold warning is set which means that all alarms are included in the alarm summary.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 29
Save on Exit: Used to enable or disable the saving of the alarm severity threshold setting at application termination.
Open at Startup
Used to set the windows that open automatically at the next system startup.
Time Display
Used to set the time zone. Displayed or saved times are dependent on settings according to the system time zone of the operation system.
Frequency Display
Used to set the kind of display (frequency or wavelength or channel numbers) with optical interfaces.
General
Alarm Flash: Used to enable or disable flashing.
Maximum numbers of list entries can be selected.
Disable Apply Button during Outstanding Data can be selected.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
30 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
3.6 EOW Configurations
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Overhead Functions...
Two Wire Handset:
Allows to select the telephone number of the NE.
Four Wire EM Interface:
Allows to connect to a EOW conference.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 31
3.7 Neighbour Ports
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Neighbour Ports...
Filter
Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
32 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
3.8 Script Configuration
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> File -> Script Configuration...
This window allows to handle script configuration files, which can be used to configure the NE.
The script language gives access to all NE configurations except for MCF, overhead cross connections and SW management.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 33
Top Section
The displayed symbols correspond to the File and Script menus:
Symbol Corresponding Menu Item
Description
File -> New File Creates a new empty script configuration file.
File -> Open... Opens an existing script configuration file.
File -> Save As... Saves the script configuration file.
Script -> Execute Starts script configuration.
Script -> Stop Stops script configuration.
Script -> Record Automatically creates a script configuration file.
For automatic creating, click the Record symbol, perform NE configurations, then click the Stop symbol.
For manual creating, enter command lines according to the syntax described below.
Bottom Section
When the script configuration file is started, the bottom section shows parser errors. To get the line of the error in the script configuration file, click the error message.
Syntax
• A semicolon follows every statement.
• A statement can occupy more than one line in the script.
• The configuration script does not support variables. All parameters must be given explicitly either as numbers or as predefined symbols.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
34 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
• The syntax is not case sensitive.
• Script statements: ObjectInstance (addressing of object instances) . Action (Parameters); ObjectInstance (addressing of object instances) . Set (Attribute, Parameters); // <Comment> or /* <comment> */
• An object instance is clearly identified by the following values: ObjectClass subrackNumber slotReference containerIndex objectIndex
The ObjectClass is always given as a symbolic keyword followed by the remaining 4 values enclosed in brackets.
Example: IFQ2G5(1, 306, 1, 1); refers to the IFQ2G5 card in slot # 306.
• A SET invoke operation on an attribute can only be invoked with an objectInstance. The keyword "Set" is used in the statements to configure values of attributes. The syntax for performing a SET invoke is: objectInstance.Set (Attribute, Value).
Example: IFS2G5(1, 303).Set(EnableTransferHistoryFileAfterStartup,enabled);
• An action can only be invoked with an objectInstance. The keyword "Action" is used in the statements to perform action invokes. The syntax for performing an ACTION invoke is: objectInstance.Action (Parameters);
Example: EquipmentManager(1,211,1,1).ConfigureRequiredEquipping(((1, 306), CardEquipped((IFS10G,"MspProtection"))));
• The "Wait" command allows the user to specify a certain amount of time that the script configuration execution procedure must hold before executing the next command or commands. The syntax for the Wait command is: Wait(<time interval between 1 to 10000 seconds>);
Example: Wait(1000);
• The "Loop" command allows the user to specify blocks of instructions that must be repeated a certain number of times. It adds to the scripting functionality the support of execution cycles. The syntax for the Loop command is: Loop(<number of times to repeat the block between 1 to 10000 or * to repeat until a user stop>); <Qst command 1>; ... <Qst command n>; EndLoop;
Examples: Loop(50); ne(1,254,1,1,1).Set(powerSupplyDuplication,enabled); EndLoop; Loop(*);
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 35
faultManager(1,254,1,1,1).Set(f4nIntegrationTime,(secondValues(3),11)); EndLoop;
• Syntax for the complex QST types:
SEQUENCE (element 1, element 2, ... element n)
SEQUENCE OF BYTE (byte 1, byte 2, ... byte n) or (<text>)
Example for ACTION: ethernetLinkage(1,511).createReachableAddressEthernet(("SIEMENSAG"), 0x1, external, (0x11, 0x22,0x33,0x44,0x55,0x66), enabled);
SET OF (element 1, element 2, ..., element n)
CHOICE <choice tag>, <QST type associated with the given choice tag>
Example: vcCo().connect(unprotectedUni, (SF2G5(1,309,2,1),SF2G5(1,309,2,3)));
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 37
4 Extension Shelf
4.1 Extension Shelf Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Extension Shelf...
This window allows to configure existing microshelves. The corresponding tab(s) will be added to the Module View.
The main shelf name (see table below) appears as Subrack 1.
Subrack ID Subrack Type
1 Main Shelf
2 Microshelf #1
3 Microshelf #2
4 Microshelf #3
5 Microshelf #4
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
38 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
4.2 ESM-CORE Card Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View of a microshelf (subrack 2 or higher), by using the context menu of an ESM-CORE card symbol -> Configuration...
Card State
Displays the card state.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup of a card.
Master System Microshelf
Displays if the microshelf is used as a master system.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 39
5 Subrack Equipping
5.1 Possible Equipping Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Information -> Possible Equipping...
This window displays the possible equipping of the NE. It gives information about the possible equipping of every slot with cards.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
40 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
5.2 Actual Equipping Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Information -> Actual Equipping...
This window displays the actual equipping of the NE. It gives information about the equipping of the slots. This information is displayed hierarchically by means of a list control to ensure that the desired information can be found efficiently.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 41
5.3 Card Inventory Summary
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Information -> Card Inventory Summary...
This window displays - in addition to NE name and location - detailed information about all configured cards: ordering / serial numbers and the used frequencies.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
42 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
5.4 Protection Shelf Number Config
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a IFO155M-E card -> Configuration -> Card...
This window allows selecting the protection shelf number.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 43
6 Card Label Information
6.1 SDH or Ethernet Interfaces Card Label Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an SDH or Ethernet interface card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
44 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
6.2 PDH Cards Label Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, single-row subrack or microshelf, by using the context menu of a PDH card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 45
6.3 IFO155M-E Card Label Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFO155ME symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
46 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
6.4 SCOH Card Label Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 47
6.5 IF2M Card Label Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a microshelf, by using the context menu of an IF2M card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
48 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
6.6 IFS40G-MX Card Label Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFS40G-MX symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 49
6.7 Booster Cards Label Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFSOB card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...
This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 51
7 Card Configuration
7.1 Card Equipment Configuration
This window is accessible via Module View, after right-clicking the slot number symbol and selecting a card that offers different provisioning modes.
This window allows you to set the provisioning mode (Empty, Empty-Auto, Working or protection if available).
If Empty-Auto is selected, it is not necessary to configure the traffic interface cards explicitly. When a traffic interface card is plugged in, the SURPASS hiT 7070 (in active NE state) will automatically detect its hardware type and add the card to the Required Equipping list.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
52 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
7.2 SCOH Card Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have selected the same clock pulse.
EOW Active
Activates the Engineering Order Wire function.
Carries Overhead Connections
Displays the current connections.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 53
7.3 CLU Card Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a CLU symbol -> Configuration...
Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup of a card.
Actual Clock Master
Displays the actual clock master.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
54 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
7.4 SF160G Card Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an SF160G symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup of a card.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have selected the same clock pulse.
Low order switching protection states
Displays the slot number of the working card and the selected switching fabric.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 55
7.5 SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration
These windows are accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an SF2G5 or SF10G symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup of a card.
Current Selected Switching Fabric
Displays the selected working or protecting switching fabric.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have selected the same clock pulse.
Carries Traffic Connections
Displays the current connections.
Carries Overhead Connections
Displays the current connections.
Note:
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
56 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The maximum number of SF2G5 cards in the subrack is limited to 4 working and 4 protecting cards.
The maximum number of SF10G cards in the subrack is limited to 4 working and 4 protecting cards.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 57
7.6 SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack
SF2G5 / SF10G - 2Mbit Connection - Slot 301
The LO switch fabric cards SF2G5 / SF10G must be inserted at slot 301 to allow cross connections to the 2-Mbit/s ports of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208, 211)
In case the LO switch fabric card SF2G5 / SF10G is inserted at another traffic slot, VC12 cross connections are possible but no 2-Mbit/s port of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208, 211) can be cross connected.
Workaround:
For connecting the 2 Mbit/s ports of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208, 211), insert and configure the LO switch card SF2G5 / SF10G always at slot 301 of the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC subrack.
For cross connecting VC12 signals only, the LO switch card SF2G5 / SF10G can be inserted and configured at any other traffic slot.
SF10G - VC4 Connection - Slot 301
Limitation:
In case the LO switch card SF10G is used at Slot 301 the VC4 containers #49, #50, #51 and #52 are invisible.
Reason:
Those four VC4 containers are used for the fixed connection of 2-Mbit/s ports 1 - 252 (4 x 63 ports = 4x VC4) to the slot 301, so that the 2-Mbit/s cross connection can be done.
Workaround:
If all 64 VC4 containers will be needed the LO switch card SF10G has to be inserted at another traffic slot but not on slot 301.
SF2G5/SF10G - Card Protection - Slot 301/302
In case the LO switch card SF2G5/SF10G on slot 302 shall be used as Card Protection (CP) it has to be configured during first commissioning. Changing the card type of the LO switch card SF2G5/SF10G on slot 302 from "working" to "protection" is not possible if cross connections already exists.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
58 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
7.7 IF2M / IF345M Card Configuration
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a microshelf, via the Module View, e.g. by using the context menu of a IF2M or IF345M symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
Possible card states:
enabled; unavailable; wrong card type; wrong card version; wrong software.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup of a card.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have selected the same clock pulse.
Current Selected Low Order Switching Fabric
Displays the selected working or protecting switching fabric.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 59
Monitored channel NE
One of the channels of the card can be switched to the monitor port (PDH-in and PDH-out simultaneously).
Monitored Channel Direction (for IF345M only)
PDH-in or PDH-out can be set.
Used in Protection
Indicates if the card is used in a protection.
AIS Insertion
Enables the AIS insertion to insert a manual AIS towards the port.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
60 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
7.8 Card Configuration for SDH Cards
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an SDH card symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup of a card.
Current Selected Switching Fabric
Displays the selected working or protecting switching fabric.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have selected the same clock pulse.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 61
7.9 IFS40G-MX Card Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the IFS40G-MX symbol -> Configuration...
Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Connection 40G Reference:
Type of Connection Reference
Relates to the fiber interconnection between the IFS40G-MX and IFS10G type cards.
Internal: Interconnection within the same NE.
External: Interconnection to another NE.
Connection Reference
In case of Internal interconnection, the connected IFS10G type cards must be configured correctly.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
62 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
7.10 Card Configuration for ETH Cards
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> Card...
Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup of a card.
Current Selected Switching Fabric
Displays the selected working or protecting switching fabric.
Selected T0 Bus
Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have selected the same clock pulse.
Carries Traffic Connections
Displays the current connections.
VLAN Concentrator Functionality State:
VLAN cards can be configured in 3 different modes:
P2P – Point to Point mode
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 63
Card is working as standard gigabit traffic card like IFQGBE / -E without VLAN functionality. All 4 ETH ports are switched ON.
VLAN C – VLAN Concentrator mode
Card is working in pure VLAN mode with 2 concentrators. ETH port #1 = concentrator #1 ETH port #3 = concentrator #2 ETH port #2 and ETH port #4 are switched off in this mode
Mixed – Mixed mode
Card is working in a mixed mode with ETH port #1 and ETH port #2 running in P2P mode, without VLAN functionality. ETH port #3 is working as VLAN concentrator #2. ETH port #4 is switched off.
Note: A change between the 3 different modes requires a deconfiguration of the card settings ( i.e. GFP/VLAN ID assignments, ...). Only the selected template does not have to be deleted.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
64 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
7.11 IFSO* Cards Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFSOB symbol -> Configuration...
Card State
Displays whether a card works normally or not.
User Label
Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.
Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup of a card.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 65
7.12 Port Provisioning Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
In this window, you can select the working or protection mode of the card.
In case of an optical interface card: Before a protection can be configured, the port(s) must be set to the projected protection type.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
66 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
7.13 IF2M - Port Provisioning Config
The window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 67
In this window, you can select the working or protection mode of the card.
Before a protection can be configured, the port(s) must be set to the projected protection type.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 69
8 Timing
8.1 Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> SEC...
In this window, you can configure timing sources that are used for synchronization. Each timing source besides internal timing can be configured according to priorities. Internal timing always has the lowest priority. The timing source, when available, with the highest priority is used for the timing derivation.
A green hook or red cross symbol next to the T0 Prio field indicates the lockout state. If a timing source is locked out (red cross), it is generally not available as a synchronization reference.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
70 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
You can toggle the lockout state by clicking this lockout symbol separately for each T1 and T3 timing source.
Currently selected timing sources for the clock pulses T0 and T4 are displayed by means of an arrow. The arrow displays the mode as set in the T0 and T4 configuration windows. For further information, see below ("Forced").
The SA bit used for SSM evaluation / insertion is configurable independently for T3 and T4. The SA bit configuration is only effective with 2-Mbit/s mode operation.
Note:
T4 Clock (T4C): The T4C output transmits a 2048 kHz signal and is squelched in case of:
• Reference source is not available in fource mode
• None of the configured reference sources is available in automatic or manual mode
• Manually by the operator command "OFF"
• In the mode "forced T0" if T0 is in holdover or free running mode
• QL enabled (use SSM for selection) and the quality of the reference clock is lower than the configured threshold; selectable thresholds are: 2-PRC, 4-SSU_T, 8-SSu_L, 11-SEC, 0-off
T4 Data (T4D): The T4D output transmits a 2048 kbit/s signal (CRC4) and will be squelched in the same cases as T4C too. For the squelch state, the clock will be diverted from T0, and "DNU" will be inserted into the SA-bit (SA=FFh).
The modes involved are as follows:
Auto: The system selects from the configured timing sources, according to the assigned priority, the best clock pulse. For the same quality, the value of the set priority is decisive (1 = very good/6 = very bad/do not use).
Forced: You can determine which timing source is used. If the selected timing source fails, a second arrow displays Selected in the Holdover field. The Forced arrow remains on the selected timing source. If the timing source can be used again, the second arrow disappears after expiry of the Wait to Restore Time. Here assigned priorities have no meaning. The jump from higher timing quality to lower timing quality is accepted immediately. The jump back from lower timing quality to higher timing quality is only accepted after expiry of the time set in the Wait to Restore Time box. This applies to the modes Forced and Auto.
If an existing synchronization with a configurable set of reference clock pulse sources is no longer available, the SEC switches from synchronous operation to the Holdover mode.
If the SEC cannot be synchronized with any external clock pulse source, it changes to the Free Running mode.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 71
Use SSM for Selection checkbox With this attribute, you configure if the selection process of timing sources considers the Quality Level (= enable) or not (= disable).
The received timing marker contains the timing quality of the reference timing of a received STM signal. It is 4 bits wide and there are 16 different values. Only six of these values are used. All other values are treated in the same way as the DNU (don’t use) value. Behind the DNU display, the received value is the displayed.
S1 (bin) SSM (hex) Display Quality level
xxxx 0010 2 PRC Q1
xxxx 0100 4 SSU-T Q2
xxxx 1000 8 SSU-L Q3
xxxx 1011 B SEC Q4
xxxx 0000 0 quality unknown Q5
xxxx 1111 F DNU (don’t use) Q6
How to Configure the Timing
How to Set Sync Priorities
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
72 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
8.2 T0 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> SEC... -> T0 -> Configuration...
Timing Source in Use for T0
Displays the current T0 timing source.
Requested Timing Source for T0
The T0 clock pulse can be derived from
• one of the T3 clock pulses (external),
• T1 clock pulses (if an SDH signal is used as timing reference),
• the NE internal clock generator (free running), in case no clock input is available.
- Auto Selection is based on the quality of the available clock pulses. - Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received quality levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections. - Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not override the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.
How to Configure the Timing
T1 Configuration
T3 / T4 Configuration
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 73
8.3 T1 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> SEC... -> T1 -> Configuration...
Timing References Tab
Allows to select the T1 timing references and displays the dedicated Synchronous Status Message (SSMs) information. Also it enables and displays available and selected rejected SSMs.
WTR Tab
Displays WTR information of the T1 timing references and allows to clear the WTR.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
74 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
How to Configure the Timing
T0 Configuration
T3 / T4 Configuration
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 75
8.4 T3 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> SEC... -> T3 -> Configuration...
T3:
T3 2 MHz SSM
Allows to set the quality level of the T3 clock by selecting a timing marker. This is necessary, because T3 as a 2.048 MHz normal timing does not contain its own SSM. The timing marker quality level is displayed in front of the selection field.
Quality level type
Quality level (decimal value)
Description
PRC 2 Primary Reference Clock: the normally used high-accuracy timing source
SSU-T 4 Synchronization Supply Unit Transit
SSU-L 8 Synchronization Supply Unit Local
SEC 11 Synchronous Equipment Clock: NE internal timing source
T3 2 Mbit Received SSM Mode
The 2-Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs in the timing signal, the 2-MHz mode does not support this handling.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
76 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
T3 Received SSMs
Displays the received quality level information.
Clear WTR T3(1) / T3(2) SSM
Allows to clear the T3(1) and T3(2) WTR times.
How to Configure the Timing
T0 Configuration
T1 Configuration
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 77
8.5 T4 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> SEC... -> T4 -> Configuration...
T4:
Timing Source in Use for T4
Displays the current T4 timing source. In the holdover and free-running modes, the T0 clock pulse has reduced frequency and phase quality. In this case, the T4 clock pulse is switched off (squelched).
Requested Timing Source for T4
- Auto Selection is based on the quality of the available clock pulses. - Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received quality levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections. - Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not override the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections. - Off disconnects the T4 output.
T4 Mode
The 2-Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs in the timing signal, the 2-MHz mode does not support this handling.
Minimum Quality Level for T4
Allows to set the minimum quality level of the T4 clock by selecting a timing marker (see above table).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
78 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
How to Configure the Timing
T0 Configuration
T1 Configuration
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 79
9 Alarms
9.1 Alarm List
This window is accessible via its toolbar button
The window displays the alarm information concerning the whole NE in detail.
The window contains a Current and a History tab. Each tab contains a list containing alarm entries and checkboxes for setting filter options for the list. The list uses the option report style for labeling and sorting the list columns.
In the list, one list entry (one line) corresponds to one alarm.
Current tab:
The tab always displays the actually raised alarms. The actual alarm state (acknowledged/unacknowledged) and the alarm severity are displayed. Filter checkboxes (show alarms with severity) for the alarm severities and the alarm states are available.
One alarm entry of the current alarm list consists of:
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
80 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Column Description
Alarm Severity Indicator
Object Object name
Location <card name>_<slot number> (.<port number> <bit rate> #<channel number>)
Alarm Alarm name
Severity Level of severity - critical, major, minor and warning
State Either unacknowledged or acknowledged
Time Date and time of alarm
Additionally, if the alarm is unacknowledged, the alarm indicator is displayed with a blue outline.
Context Menu
Each single alarm entry or multiple list entries of the current list can be selected. For the selected list entries a context menu is available (right mouse click). It provides the alarm acknowledge. If an alarm is acknowledged, the displayed state of the existing list entry is changed. If an alarm is cleared, the corresponding list entry is deleted from the current tab.
Show alarms with severity
You can select, which alarm severity has to be displayed.
Show alarms with state
You can select, whether acknowledged or unacknowledged alarms are displayed.
Alarm Counter
Displays the number of alarms that are counted according to their severity.
History tab:
The tab is a historical log containing all alarm events notified by the NE for the time the LCT is online. Only filter checkboxes for the alarm severities are available. The list contains one particular list entry for each notified alarm event of one alarm
raised
cleared (= no alarm)
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 81
The VC alarms are reported by the interface/switching cards. The assignment IPU-channel/Interface card take place by a list.
The alarm suppression has no influence to the HEL (History Event Log) entry.
Alarm entries contained in the history list are not deleted or overwritten.
One alarm entry of the history alarm list consists of:
Column Description
Alarm Severity Indicator
Object Object name
Location <slot number> (.<port number> (<channel number>)
Alarm Alarm name
Severity Level of severity - critical, major, minor and warning
Event raised, cleared
Time Time and date of alarm.
Show alarms with severity
The alarm severity is displayed and can be selected.
Click Clear History to clear the entire list.
How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling
How to Suppress Alarms
SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
82 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
TIF Fault Clearance
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 83
9.2 NEAP Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> NEAP...
The window gives an overview of the possible alarms with their most important details and allows to configure the alarm severities.
Column Description
Alarm Type Communication or Equipment
Location Logical correlation or signal type
Alarm Name Alarm designation
Object Involved path or unit
Severity Major, Minor, or No
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
84 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
9.3 Equipment Alarms
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol or of a card symbol -> Fault -> Equipment Alarms...
This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm information. The window displays all equipment alarm information concerning this object/container in detail.
The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 85
One alarm entry consists of:
Column Description
Alarm Severity Indicator
Object Object name
Alarm Alarm name
Severity Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"
State Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm
Suppression A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the red color of the symbol.
No Alarm Report (Only with communication alarms that support reporting) An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List or by the red color of the symbol.
Time Alarm date and time
The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.
How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling
How to Suppress Alarms
Communication Alarms
SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
86 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
9.4 Communication Alarms
This window is accessible via the Port Connections (using the context menu of an optical interface card symbol in the port list) -> Subview ...-> STM-n -> Fault -> Communications Alarms...
This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm information. The window displays all communication alarm information concerning this object/container in detail.
The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.
One alarm entry consists of:
Column Description
Alarm Severity Indicator
Object Object name
Alarm Alarm name
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 87
Severity Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"
State Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm
Suppression A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the red color of the symbol.
No Alarm Report (Only with communication alarms that support reporting) An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List or by the red color of the symbol.
The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.
Notes:
LofDel alarm will also be raised if the other end of the VC-path is terminated on an IFOFES-E card and is not assigned to any port.
VC3 LOM will be raised, if a cross connection exists, but the relating virtual concatenated VC is not assigned with the IFOFES-E card at the far end.
How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling
How to Suppress Alarms
Equipment Alarms
SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
88 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
9.5 Communication Alarm Feature Table
IMPORTANT!
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL manual (Operator Guidelines).
Communication Alarms
Object Alarm Severity Description Remedial Action
ETH OPT TTP FE Link Down Major Problem on the remote Ethernet termination
Fault not in the home device.
ETH OPT TTP Link Down Major Ethernet interface fail Check the Ethernet connection of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
ETH OPT TTP Remote Major Fault indication from client
Check client equipment
ETH OPT TTP TD Major Transmit Degraded Replace the concerned SFP soon.
ETH OPT TTP TF Major Transmit Fail Replace the concerned SFP.
ETH EL TTP FE Link Down Major Problem on the remote Ethernet termination
Fault not in the home device.
ETH EL TTP Link Down Major Ethernet interface fail Check the Ethernet connection of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
ETH EL TTP Remote Major Fault indication from client
Check client equipment
GFP Group LofDel Major Delineation problem of the GFP Group
Check the quality of both, the SDH and the Ethernet traffic
3/9 o´ Clock LofDel Major Delineation problem of the GFP Group serving the ring interfaces of RPR
Check the quality of both, the SDH and the Ethernet traffic
MS AIS Minor Alarm Indication Signal
Fault not in home device.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 89
MS SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop circuit. If still a SD alarm is detected, the card concerned must be replaced.
MS SSF Minor Server Signal Fail Check the concerned configuration settings.
MS RDI Warning Remote Defect Indicator
Check the output signal of the card, which may have prompted the RDI alarm. If it is correct, the concerned card must be replaced.
AU4 LOP Major Loss of Pointer Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
SYNC LTI T0 Major Loss of Timing Input T0
Check the timing input. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
SYNC LOF T3 #1,#2 Minor Loss of Frame Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
SYNC LOM T3 #1,#2
Minor Loss of Multiframe Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
SYNC LT4 Minor Loss of T4 Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
SYNC LTI T4 Minor Loss of Timing Input T4
Check the timing input. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
SYNC LTS T1 #1.. #8
Minor Loss Of Timing Signal T1 #1.. #8
Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
SYNC LTS T3 #1 #2 Minor Loss Of Timing Signal T3 #1, #2
Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
OS, OS-CO, OS-PA
LOS Major Loss of Signal Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
OS, OS-CO, OS-PA
TxFail Major Transmit Fail Replace the concerned SFP.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
90 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
OS, OS-CO, OS-PA
TxDeg Minor Transmit Degraded Replace the concerned SFP soon.
RPR Switch RPR 3o´ Clock Span Fail
Minor Link failure at 3 o' clock span
Fault not in the home device.
RPR Switch RPR 9o´ Clock Span Fail
Minor Link failure at 9 o' clock span
Fault not in the home device.
RPR Switch FOT Major Fail of topology Fault not in the home device.
RPR-LOG-PORT
FE Link Down Major Problem on the remote Ethernet termination
Fault not in the home device.
RS TIM Major Trace Identifier Mismatch
Check the Trail Trace Expected and Received configurations, they must be equal.
RS LOF Minor Loss of Frame Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
RS LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
TU LOP Major Loss of Pointer Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
VC4 (CTP) TIM Major Trace Identifier Mismatch
Check the Trail Trace Expected and Received configurations, they must be equal.
VC4 (CTP) UNEQ Major Unequipped VC4 Fault not in home device.
VC4 (CTP) SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop circuit. If still a SD alarm is detected, the card concerned must be replaced.
VC4 (TTP) LOM Major Loss of Multiframe Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
VC4 (TTP) PLM Major Pay Load Mismatch Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 91
VC4 (TTP) TIM Major Trace Identifier Mismatch
Check the Trail Trace Expected and Received configurations, they must be equal.
VC4 (TTP) UNEQ Major Unequipped VC4 Fault not in home device.
VC4 (TTP) SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop circuit. If still a SD alarm is detected, the card concerned must be replaced.
E12 LOS Major Loss of Signal Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
P12 Dem LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
P12 Dem AIS Minor Alarm Indication Signal
Fault not in home device.
P12 Dem EXC Minor Excessive bit error rate
Put the card into a loop circuit. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
P12 Map LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
P12 Map EXC Minor Excessive bit error rate
Put the card into a loop circuit. If still an EXC alarm is detected, the card concerned must be replaced.
P12 Map SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop circuit. If still an SD alarm is detected, the card concerned must be replaced.
VC12 PLM Major Pay Load Mismatch Check the input signal of the concerned card. If it is correct, the card must be replaced.
VC12 TIM Major Trace Identifier Mismatch
Check the Trail Trace Expected and Received configurations, they must be equal.
VC12 UNEQ Major Unequipped VC12 Fault not in home device.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
92 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
VC12 SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop circuit. If still a SD alarm is detected, the card concerned must be replaced.
VC3 TIM Major Trace Identifier Mismatch
Check the Trail Trace Expected and Received configurations, they must be equal.
VC3 UNEQ Major Unequipped VC3 Fault not in home device.
VC3 SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop circuit. If still a SD alarm is detected, the card concerned must be replaced.
NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance
SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance
NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 93
9.6 E3/VC3 Alarms
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack port list, by using the context menu of an IF345M card port symbol -> Subview... -> E3/VC3 -> Fault -> Communication Alarms...
This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm information. The window displays all communication alarm information concerning this object/container in detail.
The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.
One alarm entry consists of:
Column Description
Alarm Severity Indicator
Object Object name
Alarm Alarm name
Severity Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
94 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
State Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm
Suppression A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the red color of the symbol.
No Alarm Report (Only with communication alarms that support reporting) An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List or by the red color of the symbol.
The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.
How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling
How to Suppress Alarms
Equipment Alarms
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 95
9.7 1:N MSP Alarms
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an SDH interface card port symbol (with created 1: N protection) -> Subview... -> 1:N MSP -> Fault -> Communication Alarms...
This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm information. The window displays all communication alarm information concerning this object/container in detail.
The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.
One alarm entry consists of:
Column Description
Alarm Severity Indicator
Object Object name
Alarm Alarm name
Severity Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
96 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
State Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm
Suppression A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the red color of the symbol.
No Alarm Report (Only with communication alarms that support reporting) An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List or by the red color of the symbol.
The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.
How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling
How to Suppress Alarms
Equipment Alarms
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 97
9.8 TIF Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> TIF...
In this window, you can enter individual TIF line names and configure the TIF input polarity for alarm activation, according to your own requirement for telemetry tasks.
How to Configure TIF Ports
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
98 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
9.9 TCA List
This window is accessible via its toolbar button
Sorting Scheme (mouse-click on the column header)
The lists on both tabs can be sorted in the following way.
Column sorted by
Object TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by objects in ascending order. (Entries of one object are sorted by location, TCA, event, time.)
Location TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by locations in ascending order. (Entries of one location are sorted by object, alarm, event, time.)
TCA TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by TCAs in ascending order. (Entries of one alarm are sorted by object, location, event, time.)
Event TCA entries are sorted to raised and cleared. (Entries of one event are sorted by object, location, TCA, time.)
Time The most recent TCA entry is written on the top. (Entries of one time are sorted by object, location, TCA, event.)
Click Clear History to delete all entries in the History list.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 99
Current Tab:
The list on the Current tab contains only actually raised TCAs. The actual state (raised) is displayed.
One TCA entry consists of:
Column Description
Object Object name
Location <card name>_<slot number>.<port> (<bit rate>) <object name>
TCA TCA name
History Tab:
The list on the History tab is a historical log that contains all TCA events notified by the NE as long as the LCT is online.
The list contains one particular list entry for each notified TCA event of one TCA
Event: raised, cleared.
TCA entries contained in the history list are not deleted or overwritten automatically .
The displayed time is the time the NE notified the TCA event based on the NE-Time. This time entry is not overridden by the time stamp contained in the response to a TCA request initiated by the LCT, provided that the response contains the same TCA.
The maximum number of TCA list entries in the history TCA list is 1000 (configurable in the Registry).
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 101
10 Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows
10.1 STM-1 Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an IFO155M port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-1 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to the context menus.
Note:
In the headline, only the working card is shown.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
102 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
10.2 STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection
This window is accessible via the port connections by using the context menu of an IFQ622M symbol -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 103
10.3 STM-4 Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-4 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to the context menus.
Note:
In the headline, only the working card is shown.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
104 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
10.4 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol -> Subview... -> 16x AU4/VC4 -> Subview....
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 105
10.5 STM-16 Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-16 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to the context menus.
Note:
In the headline, only the working card is shown.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
106 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
10.6 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFS10G type symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 107
10.7 STM-64 Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an IFS10G port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to the context menus.
Note:
In the headline, only the working card is shown.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
108 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
10.8 ETH Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an Ethernet port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the Ethernet traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to the context menus.
Notes:
In the headline, only the working card is shown.
Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify coherences.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 109
10.9 E12 or E3 Traffic Flow
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M or IF345M port symbol respectively -> Subview...
This window shows the E12 or E3 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
110 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
10.10 VC4 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of the card symbol with activated concatenation -> Configuration VC4 configuration MUX-VC4 or VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4 #n Configuration...
VC4 Misc tab:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]
The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (B3).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 111
Signal Label:
By default, the signal label is defined by the signal type (PDH, Ethernet, etc.). However, the user can overwrite the signal label for particular applications.
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.
VC4 Trail Trace tab:
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
There are two modes:
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
TIM Consequent Actions
Enabled: TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS into all LO VCs of this VC4. For ETH cards, the AIS insertion causes a remote insertion towards the ETH port (Tx). TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled: TIM will not interrupt the traffic. TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
112 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
VC4 Mux Preparation (if offered)
Set the checkbox separately for each TUG-3 to prepare the 21 x TU-12 mux structure.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 113
10.11 VC4 Selection
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a switch fabric card symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the VC4 (Mux) #n traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
114 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
10.12 VC4 Static Multiplex Traffic Flow
***DA DEFINIRE***
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 115
11 Protection Traffic Flow
11.1 1:N MSP Protected Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with protected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
116 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
11.2 1:N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with unprotected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 117
11.3 STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFO155M protection symbol with prepared MSP protection -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-1 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
118 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
11.4 STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFQ622M protection symbol with prepared MSP protection -> Subview...
This window shows the traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 119
11.5 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFO155M symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...
This window shows the 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
120 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
11.6 STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...
This window shows the 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 121
11.7 STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
122 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
11.8 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS10G type protection symbol created 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbols and gives access to its context menu.
How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 123
11.9 STM-1 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFO155M port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...
This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
124 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
11.10 STM-4 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...
This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 125
11.11 STM-16 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...
This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
126 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
11.12 STM-64 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of IFS10G type port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...
This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 127
11.13 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS2G5 protection symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
128 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
11.14 STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 129
11.15 STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS2G5 protection symbol with prepared 4F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
130 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
11.16 STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS10G protection symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 131
11.17 STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS10G type port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
132 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
11.18 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS10G type protection symbol with prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP protection -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 133
11.19 4F SPRING Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol with created 4F-SPRING protection -> Subview...
This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 135
12 Protection Selection Windows
12.1 VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview...
This window shows the VC4 Selection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 137
13 Traffic Configuration
13.1 Port Configuration
This window is accessible via the Port connections, by using the context menu of an interface card symbol in the port list -> Port Configuration... or Configuration -> Port...
Connector Location Distributor
Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object containing the connector location at distributor.
Connector Location NE
Contains the information, with which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have been connected.
Port Operational State
Displays the running operation mode.
Loopback (if applicable)
Selection to enable or to disable internal loops.
Fibre Mode (if applicable)
Selection of the fibre mode: Dual Fibre or Single Fibre
Used in Protection (if applicable)
Indicates if the card is used in a protection.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
138 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Used as Timing Source (if applicable)
Indicates if the card is used as a timing source.
Carries Traffic Connections (if applicable)
Displays the current connections.
Carries Overhead Connections (if applicable)
Displays the current overhead connections.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 139
13.2 Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
140 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select a port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration table) -> Port Config...
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
Port VLAN ID [1..4094]
Select the required Port VLAN ID number.
Frame Priority [0..7]
Specify the frame priority.
CUG Mode Selection
Select the CUG mode:
Single:
The CUG Management button is active to open the Single CUG Management Configuration window.
Multi1:
The window is extended by the Multi1 area with the following fields:
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 141
Max. Number Of CUGs
Select the max. number of CUGs.
Max. VLAN Range
Select the max. VLAN range.
CUG ID Offset [0..4093]
Select the CUG ID offset.
After clicking Apply, a warning message is displayed informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
After clicking Yes, the CUG Management button is active to open the Multi1 CUG Management Configuration window.
Multi2:
The window is extended by the Multi2 area with two selection fields, to move Possible CUG ID values to the CUG ID list.
After clicking Apply, a warning message is displayed informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
After clicking Yes, the CUG Management button is active to open the Multi2 CUG Management Configuration window.
CUG Management
This button opens the appropriate CUG Management Configuration window.
PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration
PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration
PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration
How to Specify the CUG Service Class
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
142 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
13.3 STM-N Configuration
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an optical interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-N -> Configuration...
OS tab:
Supervision
With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with not used ports.
Port Monitoring State
Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 143
Force Laser Shutdown
The force laser shutdown immediately shuts down the laser transmitter.
Automatic Laser Shutdown
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the automatic laser shutdown. When enabled, the laser transmitter is shut down if there is no input signal. If the Single Fiber Mode is configured (i. e. the Tx and Rx signals are to be combined into one single fiber), ALS should be enabled.
Laser Restart Pulse Width [2..100s]
Displays the configured time the laser is switched on during the automatic and manual laser restart period.
Manual Laser Restart
If the manual laser restart is set, it will restart the laser manually.
No Optical Preamplifier Connected (Normal Mode) (if applicable)
The checkbox is set, if no optical preamplifier is used.
Laser Frequency
Enable the laser frequency configuration (if applicable)
SBS Suppression
Enable the SBS Suppression configuration (if applicable)
Laser Data:
Contains information about the state of the laser and the optical receiver of the optical interface.
RS tab:
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Enabling the trail trace identifier insertion.
There are two modes:
Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled: received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
144 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
TIM Consequent Actions
If checkbox is set: TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS. There is no influence to PM counters.
No checkbox setting: TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
Automatic Link Information
If this checkbox is enabled, the NE automatically inserts a value into the sent RS trace, which defines the source port. This feature shall be used for automatic link detection.
Actually Transmitted:
This string is the RS trace generated by the NE, for use with automatic link detection.
Transmitted / Expected:
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters according to G.831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received:
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
MS tab:
M0 Byte Enable Switch
Disable: only M1-byte is used for REI transmission Enable: additional M0-byte is used for REI transmission
Note: In case of interworking with SL64, disable the M0-byte switch.
Received Timing Marker
Contains the timing quality of the reference timing of a received STM signal. It is 4 bits wide and there are 16 different values. Only six of these values are used. All other values are treated in the same way as the DNU (don’t use) value. Behind the DNU display, the received value is the displayed.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 145
S1 (bin) SSM (hex) Display Quality level
xxxx 0010 2 PRC Q1
xxxx 0100 4 SSU-T Q2
xxxx 1000 8 SSU-L Q3
xxxx 1011 B SEC Q4
xxxx 0000 0 quality unknown Q5
xxxx 1111 F DNU (don’t use) Q6
Overwrite Received SSM
The quality level of the SSM from the received STM-N can be overridden by different clock source qualities before being passed to the SETS selection process.
Force don’t use for Sync
By activating this checkbox, you can prevent that the other NE-Party uses this signal as timing source.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...192000]
Specifies how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
146 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
13.4 AU4/VC4 Configuration
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n -> Configuration...
AU4/VC4 Misc tab:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
If Supervision is active, the related vcCtp is enabled for triggering a SNCP/N.
If Supervision is inactive, the related vcCtp is enabled for triggering a SNCP/I only.
Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms]
Waiting time after an alarm, before path protection switching.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]
Displays how many blocks received per second must be errored in order to declare a Bad Second for SD detection (if SD is cleared).
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (B3).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 147
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies, how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).
VC4 Trail Trace tab:
TTI Processing
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The two fields expected and received TTI are displayed.
There are two modes:
Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled: received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.
TIM Consequent Actions
Enabled: TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria. TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time. There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled: TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria. TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
148 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
13.5 VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP
For VC3: This window is accessible via the module view, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> TU3 #n -> Configuration...
For VC12: The window is accessible via the module view, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> 21 x TU-12 activated -> Apply -> Close. In the VC4 Mux #n Strukture window, select one of the numbered VC12 symbols (e.g. 1.1.1) -> Configuration...
VC3 / VC12 Misc tab:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second (for VC3 8000, for VC12 2000)
The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (for VC3 = B3, for VC12 = BIP2).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 149
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).
VC3 / VC12 Trail Trace tab:
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The two types, expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
There are two modes:
Enabled: Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled: Received TTI is monitored butin case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
TIM Consequent Actions
Enabled: TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria at LO switching matrix. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled: TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria. TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
150 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
13.6 VC3/VC12 Configuration TTP
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack, via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IF345M / IF2M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> VC3 / VC12 -> Configuration...
VC3 / VC12 Misc tab:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second (for VC3 = 8000, for VC12 = 2000)
The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 151
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (for VC3 = B3, for VC12 = BIP2).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).
Signal Label:
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.
VC3 / VC12 Trail Trace tab:
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
There are two modes:
Enabled: Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled: Received TTI is monitored but, in case of TIM no TIM alarm will raise.
TIM Consequent Actions
Enabled: TIM will cause a traffic interruption; for IF2M/IF345M with insertion of AIS towards the port, for ETH cards with insertion of Remote towards the ETH port. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. TIM will cause RDI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled: TIM will not interrupt the traffic. TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. TIM will cause RDI insertion.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
152 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII
The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 153
13.7 ETH Configuration
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an Ethernet card symbol -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Configuration
Supervision
With this field, the supervision can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with not used ports.
Port Monitoring State/Port Operation State
Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state/port operation state.
If the supervision mode is automatic, the monitoring state goes enabled, as soon as a signal at the ETH input is present. Subsequently the state stays enabled, independent whether the ETH signal is present.
Asymmetric Flow Control (to link partner)
If the asymmetric flow control is enabled, pause frames will be generated and transmitted to the link partner if
- ETH Rx traffic exceeds the configured bandwidth in the ETH-GFP assignment table of the "GFP Assignment" window,
- ETH Rx traffic exceeds the configured VC capacity in the GFP-SDH assignment table of the "GFP Assignment" window,
- with subchanneling, when the sum of Rx traffic exceeds the VC capacity.
Notes: Incoming pause frames (send by the link partner) will be dropped. Hence the NE will not reduce the speed.
Attention: If 2 ETH ports of the SURPASS hiT 7070 are connected with each other, then the following will occur:
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
154 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
In case of excessive ETH traffic inputs, both partners will send pause frames, but neither will react to these pause frames. Therefore, frames may be lost with high bit rate und different admission control or VC capacity.
Auto-negotiation (only with IFQGBE, IFQGBEB, IFOFE-E or IFOFES-E card)
Normal position is "On advertised 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s". Only for older LAN / WAN equipment which didn’t support an "Automatic Negotiation Control" the setting should be "Off Forced 10 Mbit/s" or "Off Forced 100 Mbit/s".
Remote Fault Indication
Enabled: Remote fault will be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, if the SDH route is disturbed, or the ETH port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If Remote is inserted, the ETH link partner raises Remote alarm. Furthermore, in case Remote fault is to be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, the MAC on the cards will get disabled completely. Therefore no Ethernet packets are sent any longer in both directions (i.e. neither in receive nor in transmit direction). As a consequence also the packet performance counters in ingress direction (i.e. ETH -> SDH) will not count any longer.
Note:
If more information about faults in the SDH link are to be required, it is advisable to enable the SSF and RDI fault indication on the Ethernet cards. The SSF will indicate an SDH problem on the egress direction (SDH --> ETH) which will consequently lead to the remote fault indication to the client port. Furthermore RDI will be inserted in the SDH TX direction that will indicate the original sending card that the downlink direction has a problem.
Disabled: The Tx output signal will be switched OFF, if the SDH route is disturbed, or the ETH port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If the port is switched OFF, the ETH link partner raises LinkDown. This feature is useful if the link partner is a router which considers a physical link down as one of the criteria for starting a re-routing process (e.g. a redundant path is available).
Laser Data:
Input Power Level [dBm]
Displays the current input power level.
Transmit Frequency [THz]
Displays the current transmit frequency.
Receive Frequency [THz]
Displays the current receive frequency.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 155
Note: To show the frequencies in [nm], go to the Main window -> Options -> Settings... -> Frequency Display: set to Wavelength [nm]. This feature is not applicable for 100 FX Agilent SFPs.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
156 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
13.8 E12 Configuration
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack, port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M port symbol -> Subview... -> E12 -> Configuration...
Supervision
With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with not used ports.
Port Monitoring State
Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.
P12
AIS Insertion Towards Port
The AIS insertion to E12 allows to insert a manual AIS towards the PDH port.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 157
P12 Mapping Supervision
Port Connection Supervision
disabled = no supervision
enabled = supervision on SD, EXC and LOF in mapping direction
The supervision is only relevant, if the port monitoring is enabled.
If the incoming 2-Mbit/s signal is used as timing source for the clock pulses T0 and T4, the signal must be framed and the port connection supervision must be enabled.
CRC-4 Monitoring
This attribute allows to enable/disable the CRC monitor function in mapping direction. If the switch is disabled, no CRC-4 communication alarm will be generated. The CRC processing is only relevant, if the port connection supervision and the port monitoring are enabled.
P12 Demapping Processing
Supervision/Retiming
This attribute allows to enable the retiming function for outgoing 2 Mbit/s signals. If enabled, the 2-Mbit/s signal in mapping direction is synchronized to the T0 clock. The signal is then supervised on AIS, EXC and LOF. If disabled, the outgoing 2-Mbit/s signal is not supervised and is transmitted transparently. The retimed signal can have frame slips, these slips depends on the frequency offset between the origin PDH signal and the T0. If retiming is enabled, the T0-configuration of the SEC-configuration is not to be configured as "Free Running" or "Holdover" mode. So a reference clock source must be available. If not the outgoing 2-Mbit/s signal will have AIS.
CRC-4 Insertion/Monitoring
This attribute allows to enable/disable the CRC processing function in demapping direction. If the checkbox is Disabled, no CRC-4 communication alarm will be generated. The CRC Processing attribute is only relevant, if the retiming Switch Demapper NE and the termination port monitoring are enabled. The supervision of AIS, EXC and LOF is only relevant, if the termination port monitoring is enabled.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
158 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
13.9 E3 Configuration
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a microshelf, port list, by using the context menu of an IF345M port symbol -> Subview... -> E3 -> Configuration...
Supervision
With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with not used ports.
Port Monitoring State
Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.
P3
AIS Insertion Towards Port
The AIS insertion to P3 allows to insert a manual AIS towards the PDH port.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 159
13.10 IFSOA – Config
{bmct ifsoa-pdc.bmp}
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an xxxxxx card symbol -> Information ->
Connector Location Distributor
Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object containing the connector location at distributor.
Connector Location NE
Contains the information, with which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have been completed.
Port Operational State
Displays the running operation mode.
Connection Reference
Type of Connection Reference
Relates to the fiber interconnection between the cards
Internal: Interconnection within the same NE.
External: Interconnection to another NE
Connection Reference
In case of Internal Interconnection, the connected I cards must be configured correctly.
Optical Input Power
Displays the current input power level.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
160 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Force Laser Shutdown
The force laser shutdown immediately shuts down the laser transmitter.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 161
14 Multiplex Structure
14.1 VC4 Multiplex Structure
This window is accessible via the Module View in the port list, by the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a VC4 (Mux) #n symbol [with activated mux structure]) -> Subview...
This window shows the VC4 Mux traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 163
15 Cross Connections
15.1 Cross Connections List
This window is accessible via its toolbar button
or via the Main Menu -> CrossConnections -> CC List...
In this window, you can set filter options and add, delete and display CCs (cross connections).
There are different CC types as follows:
1. Unidirectional (unprotected) CC, with CP parameter set: CP1, indicating the CP used as connection start point CP2, indicating the CP used as connection end point
2. Bidirectional (unprotected) CC, with CP parameter set: CP1, indicating the 1st CP used as connection start/end point CP2, indicating the 2nd CP used as connection start/end point
3. Unidirectional (protected for SNCP) head end CC, with CP parameter set: CP1, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start point CP2(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection end point CP2(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection end point
4. Unidirectional (protected for SNCP) tail end CC, with CP parameter set: CP1(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection start point CP1(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start point CP2, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection end point
5. Bidirectional (protected for SNCP) CC, with CP parameter set: CP1, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start/end point CP2(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection start/end point CP2(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start/end point
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
164 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
6. Combined CCs are the ones, using the Low Order SF card, which means that more than on CC is used. This include both complete and incomplete CCs, that have more than one CC.
7. Complete CCs are all, where traffic passes, this means those that have VC4 TPs in the end. This can be a normal CC between two VC4 or combined CC, that use the LO SF card.
8. Incomplete CCs are the ones, where traffic doesn't pass usually, because a CC is missing to make a complete combined CC. This are usually CCs between a HO card and the LO card or a combination, which includes also a CC between the LO card, but no other CC from the LO to an HO card.
The Add... button opens the Add Cross Connection window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Disconnect... button deletes that cross connection.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.
With an IFQGBE-E, IFOFE-E or IFQGBE card cross connection, the GFP Assignment... button opens the GFP Assignment window.
With an LNQ622M cross connection, the Link Connection... button opens the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window.
How to Create a Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection
How to Add and Remove Path Protections
How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection
How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection
How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection
How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection
How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR
How to Set Cross Connection Filter Options
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 165
How to Delete a Cross Connection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
166 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
15.2 Plain Cross Connections List
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections -> CC Plain List...
The plain cross connection list shows the real existing physical cross connections. In this window, you can add, modify, delete and display cross connections.
The Add... button opens the Add Cross Connection window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the Modify Cross Connection window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Disconnect... button deletes that cross connection.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection Graphic Details window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.
The GFP Assignment... button opens the SDH GFP Assignment window.
How to Create a Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 167
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection
How to Add and Remove Path Protections
How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection
How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection
How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection
How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection
How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR
How to Set Cross Connection Filter Options
How to Delete a Cross Connection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
168 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
15.3 Add Cross Connection
This window is accessible e.g. via the main menu -> Cross Connections -> List... -> (select an entry in the list) -> Add.
This window allows to create a new cross connection.
The selected CC Type is displayed graphically. A dashed line indicates the protection path.
After selecting VC Level, Card and TP, the "To TP A >>" button copies the selected TP to the TP A field in the New CC area. After selection another card and/or TP, the "To TP B >>" button copies the selected TP to the TP B field in the New CC area. After selection another card and/or TP, the "To TP B' >>" button copies the selected TP to the TP B’ field in the New CC area (in case of a protected cross connection). The Reset TPs button clears all selected TPs in the New CC area.
Note:
The VC-Level LCAS-VC12-nv/VC3-nv is a possibilty to connect the complete VC group from the ETH card to a SDH card.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 169
It can only be used, if the members of a VC group are adjacent (e.g. LCAS-VC12-5v 1.1.1, 1.2.1, 1.3.1, 1.2.1, 1.2.2). Otherwise the LCT connects VC12 which are not in the VC group. In the TP index field of the TPs, the first member of the group must be selected as TP (i.e. 1.1.1 of the LCAS-VC12-5v).
The Propose Connection button defines the new connection and inserts it into the cross connection list.
The Connect button creates the cross connection.
In the TP Selection list, the involved TPs are marked by asterisks.
The Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details window.
The Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.
How to Create a Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection
How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection
How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection
How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection
How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection
How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
170 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
15.4 Cross Connection Details
This window is accessible e.g. via the main menu -> Cross Connections -> List... -> (select an entry in the list) -> Details...
After selecting a list entry by clicking in one of the TP columns, the selected TP is displayed below.
The Config... button opens the AU4/VC4 Configuration window
With an IFOFE, IFOFE-E, IFOFES-E, IFOFGE, IFQGBE-E, IFQGBE, IFQGBEB or IFQGBEB-E card cross connection, the GFP Assignment... button opens the GFP Assignment window.
With an LNQ622M cross connection, the Link Connection... button opens the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window.
After selecting a list entry the following buttons are active:
The Modify... button opens the Modify Cross Connection window.
The Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection Graphic Details window
The Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.
The Concat members... button (if offered) opens the Concatenation Details window.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 171
15.5 Cross Connections Graphic
This window is accessible e.g. via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections... -> Graphic...
This window is a graphical illustration of the configured cross connections and involved cards, sorted by cross connection protocols.
The SF160G card contains the HO cross connections represented by the lines in the HO CC column of the Graphic view. This card is not displayed by itself because it has no own termination points. The SF2G5 cards contain the LO cross connections represented by the lines in the LO CC column.
If you click a graphical connecting line, the involved cards are highlighted.
Protection is not displayed in the Graphic view.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
172 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Add...
Opens the Add Cross Connection window.
List...
Opens the Cross Connections List window.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 173
15.6 Cross Connection Graphic Details
This window is accessible via the Cross Connection List toolbar button
-> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connections list) -> Details... -> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connection Details list) -> Graphic Details...
This window shows the TP relations of the selected cross connection. The context menus of the symbols allow to display the Graphic Details of the next entry in the Cross Connections List, if applicable.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
174 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
15.7 Modify Cross Connection
This window is accessible via the Cross Connection List toolbar button
-> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connections list) -> Details... -> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connection Details list) -> Modify...
This window allows to modify the CC type and TP selection of an existing cross connection.
The Add Protection button allows to add a protection to an existing cross connection.
The Swap and Add Protection button swaps TP A and TP B termination points and adds a TP B' termination point.
The Remove Work. Path button removes the working path of an existing protected cross connection.
The Remove Prot. Path button removes the protecting path of an existing protected cross connection.
The Disconnect button opens a window with a traffic interrupt warning, for disconnect the selected connection.
The Details... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.
The Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection Graphic Details window.
The Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 175
15.8 Overhead Cross Connections
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross Connections...
In this window, you can create and display various bidirectional OH Cross Connections.
OH TP List tab:
Filter:
The OH Termination Point list can be filtered by setting filter options.
The OH TP List displays all OH termination points.
Note: The OH TP List can be sorted by clicking any column heading (including the first column).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
176 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Column Description
(Symbol) Indication if this TP is involved in an OH CC
or not
The symbol is marked by a blue frame, if the TP is already set as TP A or TP B, but not yet connected.
OH Termination Point Details about involved subrack, slot, port and card and OH type.
Connection State Either Connected, if the termination point is involved in a Cross Connection or Free, if the termination point is not involved.
OH CC Type <type of TP A> - <Type of TP B>
Direction Displays the direction type of the OH TP
Involved As One of: TPA, TPB
If a list entry is selected, the Set as TP A button sets it as TP A for a new OH CC.
If a list entry is selected, the Set as TP B button sets it as TP B for a new OH CC.
If a list entry with connected OH CC is selected, the Select OH CC button displays details about the OH CC in the New OH Cross Connection field.
Before a new OH CC is connected, the TP A and TP B settings can be reset using the Reset TPs button.
The Connect button creates a new OH CC.
OH CC List tab:
Filter:
The Cross Connection list can be filtered by setting filter options.
The OH CC list displays all established Cross Connections.
Note: The OH TP List can be sorted by clicking any column heading.
One Cross Connection entry consists of:
Column Description
OH CC Type Cross Connection type.
Direction Displays the direction type of the OH CC type
TP A, TP B Termination points
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 177
The Disconnect button deletes the selected OH CC from the list.
How to Create an OH Cross Connection
How to Set OH Cross Connection Filter Options
How to Delete OH Cross Connections
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 179
16 Protection Management
16.1 Protection Management
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol -> Protection...
This window contains all prepared and created protection groups in the NE, depending on the currently configured Required Equipping of the NE.
Column Description
Protection Symbol Red cross: not active; Green small hook: active
Type Type of protection switching
Exists either yes or no
Working/West <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card
Protection/East <slot number> <card type> <port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card
Working/East <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card
Protection/West <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card
Protect. State State of protection switching
To change to a specific Traffic Flow window, double-click the appropriate list entry.
Create
Creates the selected protection in the list.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
180 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Add 1:N MSP ...
Opens the Add 1:N MSP window.
Add Link Protection
Opens the Add Extension Link Protection window.
Delete
Deletes the selected protection in the list.
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection
How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 181
17 1 plus 1 MSP Protection
17.1 STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an optical interface card symbol with created 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview... -> 1+1 MSP -> Configuration...
Line Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (1 + 1).
Working
Displays the working port.
Protecting
Displays the protecting port.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
182 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
MSP Control:
Active Line Section
Displays the line that is being used, whether the working or the protecting line.
Protection Mode
In the list, the changeover type is displayed: Revertive = returns to working after the problem in the working line has disappeared. Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has disappeared.
Operator Command
In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:
Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions. Force Clear aborts the WTR time. Lockout prevents any 1+1 MSP protection switching. The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request immediate protection switching.
Line Switching Type
Unidirectional or Bidirectional.
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:
Availability State
Displays whether the MS Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked). The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
Enter the wait to restore time.
MSP Activation
In the list, the protection switching function state can be selected:
Activated or De-activated.
Note:
If an IFO155M-E card protection is enabled and the working card has port loops enabled, then in a case of protection switching the port loops from the working card are not propagated to the protection card.
How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 183
18 1 to 1 MSP Protection
18.1 1:1 MSP Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an SDH interface card port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview... -> 1:1 MSP -> Configuration...
Line Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (1:1 MSP).
Working
Displays the working port.
Protecting
Displays the protecting port.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
184 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
MSP Control:
Active Line Section
Displays the line that is being used, whether the working or the protecting line.
Extra Traffic Squelch State
Displays the Extra Traffic Squelch State.
Protection Mode
In the list, the changeover type is displayed: Revertive = returns to working after the problem in the working line has disappeared. Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has disappeared.
Operator Command
In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:
Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions. Force Clear aborts the WTR time. The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request immediate protection switching. Lockout prevents any 1:1 MSP protection switching. Exercise Switch is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be used for testing the K1/K2 protocol
Line Switching Type
Unidirectional or Bidirectional.
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:
Availability State
Displays whether the MS Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked). The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
Enter the wait to restore time.
MSP Activation
In the list, the protection switching function state can be selected:
Activated or De-activated.
Note:
If an IFO155M-E card protection is enabled and the working card has port loops enabled, then in a case of protection switching the port loops from the working card are not propagated to the protection card.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 185
19 1 to N MSP Protection
19.1 1:N MSP Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> 1:N MSP -> Configuration...
Line Architecture
Displays 1:N line architecture.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
186 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Protecting
Displays the protection card and port.
Working:
The list displays the port and allows to configure some protection settings.
The Extend... button opens the 1:N MSP Extension window.
The Reduce button removes the port from the list.
MSP Control:
Switching State
Displays the switching state.
Protection Mode
Displays the changeover type: Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has disappeared.
Operator Command
Allows to set the priority of the protection switching:
Clear (abort the WTR) requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions. Lockout prevents any 1:N MSP protection switching. The Forced To command has a higher priority than the Manual To command. They request immediate protection switching. Exercise To is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.
Operator Command Port
Displays the operator command port.
Line Switching Type
Displays the line switching type.
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type.
Availability State
Displays whether the MS Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked). The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min]
Allows to configure the Wait to Restore Time.
MSP Activation
Allows to select the protection switching function state.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 187
Note:
If an IFO155M-E card protection is enabled and the working card has port loops enabled, then in a case of protection switching the port loops from the working card are not propagated to the protection card
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
188 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
19.2 Add 1:N MSP
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add 1:N MSP...
Bitrate
Allows to set the bit rate level.
Protection Port
Allows to select a protection port, if applicable.
Working Ports:
This area lists the selected working ports and allows to configure them, as long as the corresponding 1:N protection is not yet activated.
The Add... button opens the Add Working Ports window.
After a port is added, you can configure the port number and the Low or High priority.
The Delete button removes the selected port from the list.
The Apply button transfers the configured port(s).to the Protection Management list.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 189
19.3 1:N MSP Extension
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with created 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview... -> 1:N MSP -> Configuration... -> Extend...
Worker Section Number
Displays the worker section number.
Worker Priority
Allows to configure the worker priority.
Additional Working Port Allows to configure an additional working port.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
190 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
19.4 Add Working Ports
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add 1:N MSP... -> Add...
After a port is marked in the Possible Working Ports list, it can be moved to the Selected Working Ports list using the ">>" button, or vice versa using the "<<" button.
The Apply button copies the selected ports(s) into the Working Ports list in the Add 1:N MSP window.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 191
19.5 Working STM-1 Selection
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> (n x) STM-1 -> Subview...
This window shows the (n x) STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
192 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
19.6 Working VC4 Selection
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the (n x) AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 193
20 2F/4F-SPRING Protection
20.1 2F SPRING Configuration
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING -> Configuration...
This window displays information about 2F SPRING features and allows you to configure particular items.
Note:
The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.
Ring Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
194 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
East / West
Displays the assigned ports.
2F-SPRING Control:
Active Ring Section
Displays the ring section that is being used
Protection Mode
Displays the changeover type. Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has disappeared.
Operator Command
In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:
Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions. Force Clear aborts the WTR time. Lockout prevents any protection switching. Note that interworking with some previous equipment (e.g. SURPASS hiT7070 Release 2.1) with respect to particular Lockout of Protection commands is not possible. The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request immediate protection switching. Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.
Ring Segmentation Mode
Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type: Two Fibre Shared Ring ITU G841
Availability State
Displays whether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked). The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
Enter the wait to restore time.
MSP Activation
Activate / deactivate the MSP.
Configure Ring Topology
Opens the 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration window.
Squelch...
Opens the 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration window.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 195
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
196 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
20.2 2F-SPRING Extra Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING X -> Configuration...
This window displays information about 2F SPRING features and allows you to configure particular items.
Note:
The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.
Ring Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring Extra).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 197
East / West
Displays the assigned ports.
2F-SPRING Control:
Main Traffic Active Ring Section
Displays the ring section that is being used
Extra Traffic West Squelch State
Displays the extra traffic squelch state (West)
Extra Traffic East Squelch State
Displays the extra traffic squelch state (East)
Protection Mode
Displays the changeover type. Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has disappeared.
Operator Command
In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:
Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions. Force Clear aborts the WTR time. Lockout prevents any protection switching. Note that interworking with some previous equipment (e.g. SURPASS hiT7070 Release 2.1) with respect to particular Lockout of Protection commands is not possible. The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request immediate protection switching. Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.
Ring Segmentation Mode
Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type: Two Fibre Shared Ring ITU G841
Availability State
Displays whether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked). The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
Enter the wait to restore time.
MSP Activation
Activate / deactivate the MSP.
Note: In case of a deactivated MSP, extra traffic is not available (squelched).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
198 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Configure Ring Topology
Opens the 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration window.
Squelch...
Opens the 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration window.
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 199
20.3 4F SPRING Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 4F-SPRING protection) -> Subview... -> 4F-SPRING -> Configuration...
This window displays information about 4F SPRING features and allows you to configure particular items.
Note:
The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
200 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Ring Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Four Fibre Shared Ring).
Working West / Protecting West / Working East / Protecting East
Displays the assigned ports.
4F-SPRING Control:
Active Ring Section East / Active Ring Section West
Displays the ring section that is being used
Protection Mode
Displays the changeover type. Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has disappeared.
Operator Command West / Operator Command East
In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:
Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions. Force Clear aborts the WTR time. Lockout prevents any protection switching. Note that interworking with some previous equipment (e.g. SURPASS hiT7070 Release 2.1) with respect to particular Lockout of Protection commands is not possible. The Forced commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request immediate protection switching. Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.
Ring Segmentation Mode
Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode
K1/K2 Protocol Type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type: Four Fibre Shared Ring - ITU G.841
Availability State
Displays whether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked). The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)
Enter the wait to restore time.
MSP Activation
Activate / deactivate the MSP.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 201
Configure Ring Topology
Opens the 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration window.
Squelch...
Opens the 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration window.
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
202 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
20.4 2F / 4F SPRING Topology Configuration
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 symbol with installed 2F/4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F/4F-SPRING -> Configuration... -> Configure Ring Topology
In this window, you can configure the ring nodes with a symbolized graphical view of the ring.
Note:
The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 203
Number of ring nodes [3..16]
Enter the number of the ring nodes.
In the graphical display, nodes that are not used are grayed out.
Own Node ID [0..15]
Enter your own node ID.
Ring Map
Select a node ID for each ring node. The node ID must be unique within the ring.
2F-SPRING Configuration
2F-SPRING Extra Configuration
4F-SPRING Configuration
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
204 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
20.5 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F/4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F/4F-SPRING -> Configuration... -> Squelch...
Squelch Event Report Control
Allows to enable / disable the squelch event report control.
Squelch State
Displays the Receive / Transmit West / East squelch states for each AU4.
Squelch Table
Allows to configure the Node IDs for each AU4 in Receive and Transmit directions.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 205
20.6 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 8 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
206 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
20.7 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 207
20.8 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
208 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
20.9 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 4F SPRING protection -> Subview ... -> 32x AU4/VC4 -> Subview ...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 209
20.10 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS10G symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 32 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
210 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
20.11 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS10G symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 211
20.12 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFS10G port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... -> 64x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
212 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
20.13 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS10G symbol with created 4F SPRING protection -> Subview ...-> 128x AU4/VC4 -> Subview ...
This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 213
20.14 <2F or 4F> Spring or Spring X Nut Config
This window is accessible via the context menu card where SPRING protection is configured -> Protection... -> double click on the line of the wished spring protection -> select Configuration in the context menu of the SPRING symbol -> Nut... push-button
Nut table
It is possible for the selected AU4 No. to enable or disable the Ring Switch, Span switch.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
214 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
20.15 4F-Spring X Config
***DA DEFINIRE***
Ring Architecture
Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring Extra).
Working West / Protecting West / Working East / Protecting East
Displays the assigned ports.
Main Traffic Active Ring Section
Displays the ring section that is being used
Extra Traffic West Squelch State
Displays the extra traffic squelch state (West)
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 215
Extra Traffic East Squelch State
Displays the extra traffic squelch state (East)
Protection Mode
Displays the changeover type.
Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has disappeared.
Operator Command
In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set.
Ring Segmentation Mode
Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode
K1/K2 protocol type
Displays the K1/K2 protocol type: Two Fibre Shared Ring ITU G841
Availability State
Displays wether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked). The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.
Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive)
Enter the wait restore time.
MSP Activation
Activate / deactivate the MSP.
Note: In case of deactivated MSP, extra traffic is not available (squelched).
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 217
21 Link Protection
21.1 Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview...
This window shows the Main ISTM 4 and if applicable the ESM ISTM 4 traffic flow symbol and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
218 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
21.2 Extension Link Protection Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an LNQ622M port symbol (with installed link protection) -> Subview... -> I-LINK-PROT -> Configuration...
Working
Displays the working card and port.
Protecting
Displays the protecting card and port
Extension Link Protection Control:
Active Link Section
Displays the active link section.
Operator Command
Allows to select a protection command to be performed.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 219
21.3 Add Extension Link Protection
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add Link Protection...
Main Shelf:
Working Port
Allows to select the working port.
Connected to Extension Shelf
Displays the connection status.
Protecting Port
Allows to select the protecting port.
Connected to Extension Shelf
Displays the connection status.
Extension Shelf:
SUBRACK
Allows to select the subrack.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
220 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Working Port
Displays the working port.
Protecting Port
Displays the protecting port.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 221
21.4 ISTM 4 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview... -> Configuration
Supervision
With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with not used ports.
Port Monitoring State
Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.
Received . . . Connection:
Port
Displays the port.
Identifier
Displays the identifier
Connection Identifier (only for LNQ622M card)
With this field, the connection identifier can be selected.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
222 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
21.5 ESM ISTM 4 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview... -> Configuration
Supervision
With the field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.
If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with not used ports.
Port Monitoring State
Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.
Received . . . Connection:
Port
Displays the port.
Identifier
Displays the identifier
Connection Identifier (only for LNQ622M card)
With this field, the connection identifier can be selected.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 223
22 Concatenations
22.1 VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation. Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply. Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply. Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv -> Subview...
This window shows the Virtual VC12 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
224 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
22.2 Virtual 2x VC3 Selection
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5 symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v -> Subview...
This window shows the Virtual VC3 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 225
22.3 Virtual 4x VC4 Selection
This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of a IFQGBE port symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 -> [VC4] Subview ... -> VC4-4v -> Subview
This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
226 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
22.4 Virtual 7x VC4 Selection
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFQGBE symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 32 x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4-7v -> Subview...
This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 227
22.5 Virtual 16x VC4 Selection
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS10G symbol with VC4-16v concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4-16v #n -> Subview...
This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
228 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
22.6 Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS10G symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview ...-> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview ... -> VC4-64v -> Subview
This window shows the Virtual AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 229
22.7 Concatenated VC4 Configuration
{bmct 15201a.bmp}
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by the context menu of a PF2G5 card symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 or n x AU4/VC4 -> (VC4) Subview ... -> VC4-nv or VC4-nc -> Configuration...
This window shows the concatenation type and gives access to the configuration menu.
In Case of Virtual Concatenation VC4-nv
VC4-nv Misc:
Supervision
Supervision of the VC4 signals is active, if checkbox is set.
Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms] (if applicable)
Waiting time after an alarm, before path protection switching.
Concatenation Type
Displays the concatenation type.
In Case of Contiguous Concatenation VC4-nc
VC4-nc Misc tab:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
230 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms] (if applicable)
Waiting time after an alarm, before path protection switching.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]
The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (B3).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).
Concatenation Type
Displays the selected type of contiguous concatenation.
VC4-nc Trail Trace tab:
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.
There are two modes:
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.
TIM Consequent Actions
Enabled: TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled: TIM will not interrupt the traffic. TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 231
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
232 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
22.8 VC12-2v Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation. Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply. Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv -> Subview...
VC12-2v Misc:
Supervision
Supervision of the VC12 signals is active, if checkbox is set.
Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms]
Allows to enter the path protection hold-off time.
Concatenation Type
Displays the concatenation type.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 233
22.9 VC3-2v Configuration
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by the context menu of a PF2G5 card symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 -> VC4 Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) -> Subview... -> VC3-2v -> Configuration...
This window shows the concatenation type and gives access to supervision configuration.
VC3-2v Misc:
Supervision
Supervision of the VC3 signals is active, if checkbox is set.
Concatenation Type
Displays the concatenation type.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
234 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
22.10 Concatenation Configuration
The windows are accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an ETH cards and SF2G5/SF10G: Card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 235
SDH cards: Port symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
This window allows you to select templates for concatenation groups.
Note:
With the PF2G5, IFOFE, IFOFE-E, IFQGBE, IFQGBEB, IFQGBEB-E and IFQGBE-E cards, the user must select a template (see below). For LO switching fabric SF10G/SF2G5 and IFOFES-E, the user has to configure first the VC4 multiplex structure. Otherwise only VC3 concatenations are possible.
IFOFES-E: (via the context menu of the IFOFES-E card) Configuration -> VC4 Configuration -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation). The default configuration is VC3 with both VC4s of the IFOFES-E card. A VC12-nv can only consist of VC12 containers that originate from the same VC4. With VC3-2v, both VC3 containers must originate from the same VC4.
SF2G5/SF10G: (via the context menu of the SF2G5/SF10G card) -> Subview... -> nx VC4 selection window -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation). The default configuration is VC3 with all VC4s.
If an entry in the list is selected, the Details... button opens the Concatenation Details window.
The Add... button (if offered) opens the Add Concatenation Group window.
The Delete button (if offered) deletes the selected entry.
The Modify LCAS... button (if offered) opens the Modify LCAS Concatenation Group window.
The Template... button (if offered) opens the Concatenation Group Templates selection window.
The Modify Template (if offered) button allows a member shift between two neighboured VC4-nv groups.
The Delete Template... button (if offered) deletes all concatenation groups.
Note: You can select a template only if the card is not yet in service (i.e. no payload transmitted, no cross connection created, no GFP group assigned to SDH signals).
The following templates are available:
For the PF2G5 card:
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
236 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Template 1 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 2xVC4-4v, 1xVC4-3v)
Template 2 (3xVC3, 3xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 3xVC4-4v)
Template 3 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 1xVC4-2v)
Template 4 (3xVC3, 3xVC3-2v, 3xVC4, 1xVC4-4v)
For the IFOFE / IFOFE-E card:
Template 5 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4)
Template 6 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4-5v, 1xVC4-4v)
Template 7 (6xVC3, 6xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)
Template 8 (8xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)
Template 9 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 4xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)
Template 10 (8xVC3, 2xVC3-2v, 3xVC4-4v)
Template 16 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 2xVC4-6v)
For the IFQGBE / IFQGBEB card and the IFQGBE-E / IFQGBEB-E card:
Template 11 (4xVC4, 4xVC4-7v)
Template 12 (2xVC4, 4xVC4-4v, 2xVC4-7v)
Template 13 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 6xVC4, 2xVC4-4v, 2xVC4-7v)
Template 14 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 3xVC4-4v, 2xVC4-7v)
Template 17 (4xVC4-8v)
Template 18 (14xVC3, 14xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 2xVC4-8v)
Template 19 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 3xVC4-8v)
Template 20 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 2xVC4-4v, 1xVC4-8v)
How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 237
22.11 Concatenation Details
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a packet switch card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation..., select via Template button a template -> Apply; select a line from the list and press the Details button
This windows displays details about the selected concatenation group.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
238 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
22.12 Add Concatenation Group
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add...
Concatenation Type
Select the required type from the list.
Group ID
Enter the group ID. It depends on the card type.
Available TPs / Selected TPs
Select the required TPs and click >> to move them into the Selected TPs list.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 239
22.13 Concatenation Group Templates
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an Ethernet card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Template...
This window offers some proven concatenation group templates to ease the configuration.
Note: You can select a template only if the card is not yet in service (i.e. no payload transmitted, no cross connection created, no GFP group assigned to SDH signals).
Note: If a VC4-nv is to be generated, the selected template must contain two VC4-4v.
Note: For VLAN operation modes, only templates containing VC3 or VC3-2v should be selected. High order VC´s (VC4 and VC4-nv) cannot be assigned to VLAN concentrators.
GFP Assignment
How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
240 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
22.14 Modify Template
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFOFE-E card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... (select an entry in the list) -> Modify Template...
This window can be used to generate VC4-nv containers.
Note:
Only two VC4-4v can be changed in one template.
Two VC4-nv can be generated, but the sum must always be eight VC4s.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 241
22.15 VCLO-Concatenation Configuration
***DA DEFINIRE***
Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms]
Allows to enter the path protection hold-off time.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 243
23 VLAN
23.1 VLAN Functionality
General remarks on VLAN functionality VLAN functionality is supported by the IFQGBEB (optical) and IFQGBEB-E (electrical) cards. These card types can be configured in 3 different modes.
1. Point to point mode (P2P) All 4 ETH ports working P2P like IFQGBE /-E cards.
2. VLAN C mode Cards are running with 2 independent VLAN Concentrators: VLAN C1 on gigabit ETH port #1 VLAN C2 on gigabit ETH port #3 ETH ports #2 and #4 are switched OFF in this mode. There is a fixed relation between Concentrator -- GFP Group -- VC as follows: ETH port #1 - VLAN C1 -- GFP group #1 - #8 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 1-16. ETH port #3 - VLAN C2 -- GFP group #9 - #16 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 17-32.
3. Mixed Mode Cards are running with 2 ports point to point (P2P) mode and one port with VLAN concentrator functionality as follows: ETH port #1 and #2 - P2P mode -- GFP group #1 or #2 -- AU channels of range 1-16 ETH port #3 - VLAN C2 -- GFP group #9-16 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 17-32 ETH port #4 - switched OFF Change between the 3 different modes requires a deconfiguration of the already applied card configuration.
Uplink and Downlink functionality
On VLAN modes it is distinguished between uplink and downlink.
Uplink is related to the gigabit ports ETH #1 and #3 of IFQGBEB /-E, that the concentrators C1 and C2 are internally connected to.
Downlink is related to the VCs, that they can be assigned to the concentrators GFPs.
These VCs carrying ethernet frames through GFP encapsulation can be crossconnected via the SDH network to the so called downlink port on other ethernet cards.
Basic functionality of the concentrators from downlink VCs to uplink port (upstream direction):
• Receiving ethernet frames on assigned VCs with GFP encapsulation
• Determination of VLAN ID for received frame according to user defined table (Add VLAN ID Assignment)
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
244 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
• Decapsulating ethernet frame (removal of GFP header)
• Inserting of VLAN Tag in ethernet frame
• Sending out tagged frame on gigabit uplink
• Processing of up to 8 GFP groups
• Processing of up to 8 subchannels per GFP group
Basic functionality of the concentrators from uplink port to downlink VCs (downstream direction):
• Receiving of VLAN tagged frame on gigabit uplink port
• CRC and VLAN tag present check
• Determination of downlink VC - GFP channel for received tagged ethernet frame according to user derfined table (Add VLAN ID Assignment)
• Removal of VLAN tag
• Removal of ETH frames with not determined VLAN tag
• Encapsulating of ethernet frame into GFP frames
• Mapping GFP encapsulated ethernet frame in assigned downlink VC
Note: On the downlink VC, only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned. Regarding the Concatination Config for VLAN modes its therefore recommended to use template 18 in case of VLAN C mode and template 19 or 20 in case of Mixed mode.
Tag interpretation in VLAN modes
VLAN Tag format accoding to 802.1q:
Type Field
• Ethertype 0x8100 will be inserted in upstream direction and is expected for tagged frames received on gigabit uplink port towards downstream
Priority Field
• not interpreted in downstream direction (untagging)
• set to zero in inserted VLAN tag in upstream direction (tagging)
CFI Field
• not interpreted in downstream direction (untagging)
• set to zero in inserted VLAN tag in upstream direction (tagging)
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 245
VLAN ID
• 1 ... 4094 freely configurable
Stacked VLANs or VLAN tunneling is supported, but there is no support for structured VLANs (i.e. 4095x4095 VLAN IDs for interpreting two subsequent VLAN headers in one Frame).
Downstream VLAN tagged frames received on the gigabit uplink port which are shorter than 68 bytes (64 ... 67 Bytes including VLAN tag) will be extended to 64 byte length again after the removal of the VLAN tag in the concentrator (padding). This extension is done by adding a maximum of 4 bytes at the end of the frame before the FCS bytes.
Mutual influence of downstream speeds through flowcontrol on gigabit upstream port
Ports of IFQGBEB and IFQGBEB-E cards belonging to a VLAN concentrator domain do not support admission control like IFQGBE and IFQGBE-E and the Point to Point (P2P) mode of VLAN cards do. This means that an incoming VLAN stream on the gigabit uplink port assigned to a downstream capacity of VC3 or VC3-2v cannot be limited by means of admission control. Therefore care has to be taken at the device connected to the gigabit upstream port, to not overrun the assigned downstream VCs. This goal can be reached through limiting the data rate of such a stream on the router / server site according to the assigned downstream VC capacity.
If a downstream VC is overrunned, two scenarios have to be considered:
• Asymmetric Flow Control is enabled on the gigabit uplink port. MAC control frames (Pause) will be send out on the gigabit port. Since pause frames cannot be classified all the VLAN streams of the device connected to the gigabit uplink port will be slowed down to the speed of the overrunned downstream VC.
• Asymmetric Flow Control is disabled on the gigabit uplink port. Frames in downstream direction will be discarded in case the assigned downstream VC capacity is exceeded.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
246 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
23.2 VLAN C Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality State : VLAN C -> Apply In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview...
This window shows the VLAN C traffic flow and gives an overview of the assigned VCs to GFP relation. Context menues of the ETH port (ETH Configuration), VLAN C IDs (Assigned VLAN IDs Information), GFP groups (GFP Frames Performance) and assigned VCs (VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards) can be directly accessed from here. The dotted line between GFP group and VC symbol indicates that for this GFP group no VC assignment has yet been done. The GFP groups are fixed assigned to the VLAN concentrator -> no dotted line. Each VLAN concentrator has a separate traffic flow window.
Note for VLAN operation:
The VLAN functionality only makes sense if more than one stream/VLAN are used. For these point-to-multipoint applications QoS provided by an external (egress) traffic shaper at the uplink port is mandatory. Therefore the L2 service multiplexer function requires external (i.e. BRAS, Router) traffic shaping. This means it is absolutely MANDATORY that for the VLAN concentrator application egress traffic shaping per VLAN including max. burst size is implemented in the uplink device (i.e. a BRAS in case of the DSL-scenario). This will avoid head-of-line blocking in case of multiple VLAN-streams sharing the common GbE interface.
If this is not done, then an overflow of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer as well as the egress buffers of a receiving FE card may happen. By this packet loss will not be avoidable (depending on the situation):
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 247
• Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE VLAN card is disabled and the connected BRAS does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. The reasons for this frame drop are FIFO overflows of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer as well as the receiving FE card's egress buffer.
• Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE card is enabled and the connected BRAS does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. Here only overflows of the receiving FE card's egress buffer may happen. Nevertheless the enabled flow control has influence on all eight GbE VLAN ingress buffers (one buffer for each of the possible 8 downlink ports): If for one VLAN queue the ingress buffer overflows, the activated pause frame mechanism will stop all other queues as well (i.e. also the incoming frames to be sent in other FIFOs).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
248 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
23.3 VLAN Selection
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality State : VLAN C -> Apply In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids... -> Add... -> Apply -> Close. In the VLAN C #n Traffic Flow window select VLAN C #n -> Subview
This window shows all assigned VLAN IDs per VLAN concentrator. It gives access to the VLAN communication alarm and copy function of the alarm setting onto other VLAN IDs.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 249
23.4 VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality State : VLAN C -> Apply -> Close -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
GFP-SDH Assignment
Note: First, the VC structure has to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation Group Templates window.
On VLAN concentrators only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned. High order VC’s (VC4 and VC4-nv) can not be assigned to VLAN concentrators
Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption!
The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.
Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be dropped.
On VLAN C mode GFP group #1- #8 are fixed assigned to VLAN Concentrator 1 on ETH uplink port #1.
GFP group #9 - #16 are fixed assigned to VLAN Concentrator 2 on ETH uplink port #3.
On VLAN uplink port #1 (GFP group #1 - #8) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 1 - 16 can be assigned.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
250 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
On VLAN uplink port #3 (GFP group #9 - #16) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 17 - 32 can be assigned.
If subchannelling is enabled each GFP subchannel will be tagged in upstream direction with its respective VLAN ID as configured in the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.
In VLAN C mode with 8 GFP groups per concentrator and a maximum of 8 VC subchannels per GFP group, up to 64 (8x8) downlinkports can be assigned to one VLAN concentrator. These downlinkports are VLAN tagged and multiplexed on the gigabit uplink port #1 or #3 (uplink direction). In the down link direction the same principle applies with untagging and mapping frames on the max. 64 downstream VCs.
Note: In VLAN concentrator admission control (bandwidth limitation) can not be configured as in IFQGBE /-E cards or P2P mode.
Therefore care has to be taken on the gigabit uplink (port #1 or #3) in downstream direction to not overrun the downstream VC capacity or the speed of the downlink port on the other end of the VC.
The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.
This alarm raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.
VLAN ID Assignment...
Opens the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.
VLAN C ETH Config...
Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.
GFP Group Subview...
Opens the GFP Group Subview window.
VC4 Subview...
Opens the VC4 Selection window.
How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 251
How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
252 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
23.5 Mixed Mode GFP Assignment
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality State: Mixed -> Apply -> Close -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
VLAN C-GFP Assignment
On VLAN mixed mode GFP group #9 - #16 are fixed assigned to VLAN concentrator 2 on ETH uplink port #3.
ETH-GFP Assignment
Here ETH ports #1 and #2 running in standard point to point mode can be configured.
Assign ETH ports #1 and #2 to the GFP group #1 or #2 and enter the bandwidth for each ETH port.
The value range is configurable : 1...1000 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.
Note:
The sum of the bandwidths of all ports assigned to one GFP group must not exceed the capacity of the assigned Virtual Container (VC). Approx. values: VC3: 50 Mbit/s, VC3-2v: 100 Mbit/s, VC4: 155 Mbit/s, VC4-4v: 622 Mbit/s, VC4-7v: 1000 Mbit/s.
All frames will be dropped, if the channel numbers of sink and source are different.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 253
GFP-SDH Assignment
Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation Group Templates window. Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.
Assignment point to point mode GFP groups #1 and #2 On GFP Group #1 and #2 VCs of AU4 channels 1 - 16 can be assigned.
The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An extension header is required if the GFP group contains both 2 point to point mode ports (ETH #1 and #2).
Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be dropped.
Assignment VLAN C2 - GFP Groups #9 - #16:
On VLAN concentrators only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned. High order VC’s (VC4 & VC4-nv) can not be assigned to VLAN concentrators.
On VLAN uplink port #3 (GFP group #9 - #16) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 17 - 32 can be assigned.
The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.
If subchannelling is enabled each GFP subchannel will be tagged in upstream direction with its respective VLAN ID as configured in the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.
In VLAN C Mode with 8 GFP groups per concentrator and a maximum of 8 VC subchannels per GFP group, up to 64 (8x8) downlinkports can be assigned to one VLAN concentrator. These downlinkports are VLAN tagged and multiplexed on the gigabit uplink port #3 (uplink direction). In the down link direction the same principle applies with untagging and mapping frames on the max. 64 downstream VCs.
Note: In VLAN concentrator admission control (bandwidth limitation) can not be configured as in IFQGBE /-E cards or point to point mode. Therefore care has to be taken on the gigabit uplink (port #3) in downstream direction to not overrun the downstream VC capacity or the speed of the downlink port on the other end of the VC.
Equal for all GFP Groups:
The supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.
Note:
If a received VC indicates to carry GFP framed traffic (signal label) and this is the expected signal label (no PLM detected), but no packets can be delineated from this VC, a LofDel alarm is raised. This alarm also raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
254 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption (in all VLAN & point to point GFPs)!
VLAN ID Assignment...
Opens the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.
VLAN C ETH Config...
Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.
ETH Config...
Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.
GFP Group Subview...
Opens the GFP Group Subview window.
VC4 Subview...
Opens the VC4 Selection window.
How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups
How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 255
23.6 Assigned VLAN IDs Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality State : VLAN C -> Apply In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids...
This window displays information about assigned VLAN Ids. Each VLAN concentrator has a separate window, showing the assigned IDs.
The Add... button opens the Add VLAN ID Assignment window, to assign new VLAN IDs.
With the Delete button, a selected VLAN ID from the list can be deleted.
Note: Deleting a VLAN ID stops traffic in UP- and downstream direction through the concentrator for the before assigned GFP channel.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
256 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
23.7 Add VLAN ID Assignment
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality State : VLAN C -> Apply In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids... -> Add...
In this window, make the necessary VLAN assignment settings. Each VLAN concentrator has a separate window for VLAN ID assignments.
With the VLAN ID assignment the correlation between the VLAN tagged streams on the gigabit uplink port and the VC downstream channels is done.
First choose the GFP group and GFP channel in that your signal is running and then set the desired VLAN ID for that stream.
If subchanneling is enabled for the respective GFP group (in GFP Assignment window) GFP channel 0...7 are available to assign to a VLAN ID. In case subchanneling was disabled (in GFP Assignment window) the GFP channel line is grayed out. (The dim visable `0´ is a default that can be ignored.) Once a VLAN ID has been assigned to a GFP group/channel without subchanneling this group will no longer be available in the GFP group line for selection.
VLAN IDs can be assigned to a GFP group/channel without having assigned a VC3 or VC3-2v to that group before.
With the VLAN ID assignment the correlation between the VLAN tagged streams on the gigabit uplink port and the VC downstream channels is done.
VLAN IDs can be freely selected in the area of 1...4094. VLAN ID 0 and 4095 are reserved as stated in 802.1Q and can therefore not be assigned.
VLAN Functionality
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 257
24 Virtual VCs
24.1 Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of a IFS10G symbol with VC4-nv concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4-2v #n -> Subview...
This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
258 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
24.2 Virtual VC12 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation. Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply. Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 259
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv -> Subview... -> Virtual VC12 #n -> Configuration...
Virtual VC12 Misc tab:
Supervision
Supervision of the VC12 signals is active, if checkbox is set.
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects of the IFOFES-E cards.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...2000]
The entry shows how many received blocks per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (BIP2).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).
Signal Label: (only IFOFES-E cards)
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.
Virtual VC12 Trail Trace tab:
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted (only IFOFES-E cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.
There are two modes:
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
260 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled: received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
TIM Consequent Actions
For SF2G5/SF10G cards: Enabled: TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria. TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time. There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled: TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria. TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
For IFOFES-E cards: Enabled: TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of remote. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled: TIM will not interrupt the traffic. TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 261
24.3 Virtual VC3 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5 symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v -> Subview... -> Virtual VC3 #n -> Configuration...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
262 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Virtual VC3 Misc tab:
Supervision
Supervision of the VC3 signals is active, if checkbox is set.
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects of ETH cards.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1.. 8000]
The entry shows how many received blocks per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (B3).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2..10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).
Signal Label: (only at vcTtp objects of ETH cards)
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.
Virtual VC3 Trail Trace tab:
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted (in case of vcTtp objects of ETH cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal..
There are two modes:
Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled: received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 263
TIM Consequent Actions
For SF2G5/SF10G cards: Enabled: TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria. TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time. There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled: TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria. TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
For ETH cards: Enabled: TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of remote. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled: TIM will not interrupt the traffic. TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
Virtual VC4 Configuration
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
264 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
24.4 Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> Concatenation Type = VC4-4v... -> Apply. Return to the Port List symbol -> Subview... -> 4x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4-4v -> Subview -> Virtual AU4/VC4 #n -> Configuration...
Virtual VC4 Misc tab:
Supervision (if available)
Supervision of the VC4 signals is active, if checkbox is set.
RDI/REI Insertion (if available)
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]
The entry shows how many received blocks per second are allowed to be bad.
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (B3).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 265
Signal Label: (only at vcTtp objects of ETH cards)
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC4 signal. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected signal label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.
Virtual VC4 Trail Trace tab:
The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted (in case of vcTtp objects of ETH cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.
There are two modes:
Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled: received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.
TIM Consequent Actions
For SDH cards: Enabled: TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria. TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time. There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled: TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria. TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
For ETH cards: Enabled: TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of remote. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled: TIM will not interrupt the traffic. TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
266 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
Virtual VC3 Configuration
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 267
25 GFP Configurations
25.1 GFP Group Traffic Flow
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an PF2G5 symbol in the port list -> Subview...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
268 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
This window shows the GFP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.
Note:
Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify coherences.
How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 269
25.2 GFP Group Subview
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an Ethernet card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Group Subview...
This window shows the GFP groups and gives access to their context menus.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
270 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
25.3 GFP Assignment
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBE-E card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...
Note:
If a received VC indicates to carry GFP framed traffic (signal label) and this is the expected signal label (no PLM detected), but no packets can be delineated from this VC, a LofDel alarm is raised.
ETH-GFP Assignment
Through this table, an Ethernet port is assigned to a GFP group which can consist of one or more GFP channels. Subchanneling is implemented if several Ethernetports are assigned to a single GFP group.
Assign ETH ports to the GFP groups (if provided) and enter the Bandwidth for each ETH port.
The value range depends on the port type:
Fast Ethernet 10Base-TX: 1...10 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.
Fast Ethernet 100Base-TX: 1...100 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.
Gigabit Ethernet 1000Base-SX/LX: 1...1000 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.
Notes:
The IFOFES-E card does not support admission control (bandwidth limitation). This can be done by adding or removing VC12 containers of a virtual concatenation group (2 Mbit/s granularity).
The sum of the bandwidths of all ports assigned to one GFP group must not exceed the capacity of the assigned Virtual Container (VC). Approx. values: VC3: 50 Mbit/s, VC3-2v: 100 Mbit/s, VC4: 155 Mbit/s, VC4-4v: 622 Mbit/s, VC4-7v: 1000 Mbit/s.
All frames will be dropped, if the channel numbers of sink and source are different.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 271
GFP-SDH Assignment
Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation Group Templates window.
Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.
Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption!
The Subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.
The IFOFES-E card does not support subchanneling (extension header). Therefore the user must pay attention that the incoming VC/VC group does not have an extension header, otherwise all ETH frames will be dropped.
Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be dropped.
The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.
This alarm is raised if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.
ETH Config...
Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.
GFP Group Subview...
Opens the GFP Group Subview window.
VC4 Subview...
Opens the VC4 Selection window.
PF2G5 GFP Assignment
How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups
How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
272 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
25.4 PF2G5 GFP Assignment
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...
LP Bandwidth Configuration
Enter the Ingress Bandwidth and Egress Bandwidth for each LP port.
Value range: 1...450 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.
GFP-SDH Assignment
Assign the VC or VC group to each GFP group and enable/disable supervision.
RPR-SDH Assignment
Select Quad or Single SDH Capacity and assign the VC or VC group to the RPR and enable/disable supervision.
Port Config...
Opens the PF2G5 Config window, after selecting a port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration table.
GFP Group Subview...
Opens the GFP Group Selection window.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 273
VC4 Subview...
Opens the VC4 Selection window.
How to Create / Delete VC Channels
How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups
How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel
How to Configure RPR Bandwidths
How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG
How to Specify the CUG Service Class
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
274 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
25.5 PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select a port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration table) -> Port Config... (select Single CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG Management
CUG ID [0..4095]
Select the CUG ID.
Service Class
Select the Service Class.
Ingress Stream Bandwidth [1..450]
Select the Ingress Stream Bandwidth.
Egress Stream Bandwidth [1..450]
Select the Egress Stream Bandwidth.
Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth [1..450]
Select the Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth.
VLAN Mode
Select the VLAN mode.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 275
How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG
How to Specify the CUG Service Class
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
276 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
25.6 PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration) -> Port Config... (select Multi1 CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG Management
The table allows to enter the Multi1 CUG configuration settings according to the network planning.
How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG
How to Specify the CUG Service Class
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 277
25.7 PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration) -> Port Config... (select Multi2 CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG Management
Tunnel Tag Prot ID
Enter the Tunnel Tag Prot ID
The table allows to enter the Multi2 CUG configuration settings according to the network planning.
How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG
How to Specify the CUG Service Class
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
278 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
25.8 PF2G5 Add CUG
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration table) -> Port Config... (select Multi2 CUG Mode, move at least 1 entry from the "Possible CUG ID values" list to the "CUG ID list") -> Apply -> CUG Management -> Add CUG
CUG ID [1..4095]
Select the CUG ID.
Tunneling Mode
Activate / Deactivate the tunneling mode.
Service Class
Select the Select Class.
Ingress Stream Bandwidth [1..450 Mbps]
Select the Ingress Stream Bandwidth.
Egress Stream Bandwidth [1..450 Mbps]
Select the Egress Stream Bandwidth.
Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth [1..450 Mbps]
Select the Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 279
PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration
PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration
PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration
How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
280 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
25.9 SDH GFP Assignment
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections -> Plain List... (e.g. using a cross connection of an IFOFGE-E card, by selecting an entry in the list) -> GFP Assignment...
GFP-SDH Assignment
Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation Group Templates window.
Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.
Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption!
The VC/VC Group column allows to select a VC.
The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.
This alarm raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.
ETH Config...
Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.
GFP Group Subview...
Opens the GFP Group Subview window.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 281
VC4 Subview...
Opens the VC4 Selection window.
How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 283
26 LCAS
26.1 LCAS State Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Configuration -> LCAS State...
This window shows the LCAS state of all LCAS virtual groups in the network element. With filters, the operator can select special groups.
Filter:
The Termination Point list can be filtered by setting filter options.
Selected Item:
Sink
Displays the sink state.
Source
Displays the source state.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
284 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
LCAS Source Direction State
Allows to set the LCAS source direction state.
Note: One member of a LCAS group could have three states: idle = The LCAS protocol is not activated active = the LCAS protocol is activated failed = failure in the signal
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 285
26.2 Modify LCAS Concatenation Group
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E card with VC3 or VC12 LCAS concatenation -> Configuration -> Concatenation (with an entry in the list selected) -> Modify LCAS...
This window allows to select the number of members in the concatenation and to select the associated TPs from the list of available TPs.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
286 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
26.3 LCAS VC3-nv Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Configuration...
LCAS VC3-1v Misc:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
Concatenation Type
Displays the concatenation type.
Configured LCAS Group Capacity/Mbps
Displays the Configured LCAS Group Capacity.
LCAS: Partial Loss Threshold
Allows to set separate thresholds in case of partial loss of received / transmitted capacity.
Partial Loss of Capacity: You can allow a minimum capacity (Mbit/s) by configuration, which an LCAS group can have. If there is a VC3-2v (2x 48 Mbit = 96 Mbit) and the threshold is set to 90, then an alarm rises, when 1 VC3 is turned out.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 287
26.4 LCAS VC12-nv Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply. Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in the upper part of the Module View -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply. Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Configuration -> TP...
LCAS VC12-1v Misc:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision for this LCAS group alarms. This supervision has no influence to the alarms of the included VCs.
Concatenation Type
Displays the concatenation type.
Configured LCAS Group Capacity/Mbps
Displays the Configured LCAS Group Capacity.
LCAS: Partial Loss Threshold
Allows to set separate thresholds in case of partial loss of received / transmitted capacity.
Partial Loss of Capacity: You can allow a minimum capacity (Mbit/s) by configuration, which an LCAS group can have. If there is a VC12-5v (5x 2.1 Mbit = 10.5 Mbit) and the threshold is set to 7, then an alarm rises, when 2 VC12 are turned out.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
288 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
26.5 LCAS VC3-nv Virtual VC3 Selection
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Subview...
This window shows the LCAS Virtual VC3 traffic flow symbol(s) and gives access to the context menu(s).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 289
26.6 LCAS VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply. Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in tne upper part of the Module View -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply. Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Subview ...
This window shows the LCAS Virtual VC12 traffic flow symbol(s) and gives access to the context menu(s).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
290 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
26.7 LCAS Virtual VC3 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Subview... -> LCAS Virtual VC3 #n -> Configuration...
LCAS VC3 Misc tab:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]
The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 291
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (B3).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).
Signal Label:
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.
LCAS State:
Sink
Displays the sink state.
Source
Displays the source state.
LCAS Source Direction State Allows to set the LCAS source direction state.
LCAS VC3 Trail Trace tab:
The LCAS Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
TTI Processing
There are two modes:
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.
TIM Consequent Actions
Enabled: TIM will switch off this VC, the VC group capacity will be reduced by this VC. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
292 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
TIM will cause RDI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled: TIM will not interrupt the traffic. TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. TIM will cause RDI insertion.
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 293
26.8 LCAS Virtual VC12 Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply. Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in tne upper part of the Module View -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply. Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Subview ... -> LCAS Virtual VC12 #n -> Configuration...
LCAS VC12 Misc tab:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision of this VC.
RDI/REI Insertion
The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects.
No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...2000]
The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
294 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored Blocks (BIP2).
No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]
Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).
Signal Label:
Transmitted
The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
For GFP mapping, the signal label = 13.
Expected
Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by scrolling through the whole number range.
Received
Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.
LCAS State:
Sink
Displays the sink state, i.e. the state of the incoming single VC.
Source
Displays the source state, i.e. the state of the outgoing single VC, as received by the remote station.
Note: In order to have LCAS traffic, at least one of the source members must be set to "Active".
LCAS Source Direction State
Allows to set the LCAS source direction state.
To increase the group capacity, this VC can be added by setting it to Active. This increases the capacity in outgoing direction.
Note: One member of a LCAS group could have three states: idle = the LCAS protocol is not activated active = the LCAS protocol is activated failed = failure in the VC12
LCAS VC12 Trail Trace tab:
The LCAS Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 295
TTI Processing
There are two modes:
Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.
Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.
TIM Consequent Actions
Enabled: TIM will cause an interruption of this single VC and will reduce the group capacity. TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. TIM will cause RDI insertion. There is no influence to PM counters.
Disabled: TIM will not interrupt the traffic or reduce the group capacity. TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur. TIM will cause RDI insertion.
Transmitted / Expected
ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.
Received
The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 297
27 MCF General
27.1 Message Communication Functions
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF...
This window contains functional symbols representing the different layers for message communication. The symbols are used to select the components of the MCF.
Context Menu:
In the View, right-click the symbol to open the respective context menu.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
298 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
27.2 MCF Stack Parameters Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Stack Parameters -> Configuration...
Notes:
When stack parameters are changed, the stack restarts. Connection to NE has to be reestablished.
Layer 4 (Transport):
Window Timer [5..1009]/10s
The Window timer specifies the maximum time between windows updates used for this connection. The window timer therefore is used to send AK TPDU when there is no activity on the transport connection, in order to avoid a premature disconnection by the peer entity. This parameter also controls the inactivity timer. If no acknowledgement PDUs from the opposite station are received for a time computed as the product of the Window Timer and the Maximum No. of Transmissions, Layer 4 quits the connection.
Maximum No. of Transmissions [3..16]
Displays the time after the data packet is repeated if there was no acknowledgement for this packet from the opposite station.
Retransmission Time [250..64000 ms]
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 299
Specifies the time after the data packet is repeated if no acknowledgement for this packet by the opposite station was received.
Layer 3 (NSAP):
Area Address
The address range forms part of the NSAP address (area, system ID, and selector) and is mainly defined by the first byte of the NSAP address. That first byte, called AFI, defines the length and the byte rate from all three parts. The NSAP address has to be fixed by the DCN planning.
Note:
The NSAP address has to be unique.
System ID
The System ID is 6 Bytes long.
Note:
The System ID as part of the NSAP address has to be planned by the DCN planning team.
NSAP Selector [1.255]
The NSAP Selector is a part of the own NSAP address.
Note:
The NSAP selector has to be "01"!
Layer 3 (CLNS):
CLNS Maximum Lifetime [2..255]
Displays the maximum lifetime of a CLNS PDU in steps of 0.5 seconds. If a CLNS PDU is forwarded by an intermediate system, the lifetime of this PDU is always decremented by at least 0.5 seconds.
Routing Principle
Displays if a system belongs to the OSI routing backbone (L2) or to an single OSI area only (L1).
Note:
The configuration is only accessible to user level 4. A change of configuration could be followed by a loss of connection.
How to Configure NSAP Settings
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
300 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
27.3 MCF Transport Connection Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Information...
In this window, the performance information of a connection to a remote NE is displayed.
Remote NSAP Address
Displays the NSAP Address of the connected LCT/NCT/OS.
Remote T Selector
T Selector used by the remote manager for this transport connection.
Local T Selector
T Selector used by this NE for this transport connection.
Connection Type
Direction of the transport connection setup. (Outgoing = sent from the local system, Incoming = sent from the remote system).
Window Timer [5..1009]/10s
The Window timer specifies the maximum time between windows updates used for this connection. The window timer therefore is used to send AK TPDU when there is no activity on the transport connection, in order to avoid a premature disconnection by the peer entity. This parameter also controls the inactivity timer. If no acknowledgement PDUs from the opposite station are received for a time computed as the product of the Window Timer and the Maximum No. of Transmissions, Layer 4 quits the connection.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 301
Maximum No. of Transmissions [3..16]
Displays, how often a data packet (Acknowledge) has to be repeated.
Retransmission Time [250..64000 ms]
Displays the time after the data packet is repeated if there was no acknowledgement from the opposite station.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
302 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
27.4 MCF Transport Connection Performance
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Performance...
This window displays how many bytes were received and sent and how many Packet Data Units (PDUs) where received, sent and repeated.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 303
28 MCF CLNS
28.1 MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Information...
This window displays information for network configuration for the local NE.
Destination Areas
Address Prefix displays the address part of the destination area.
Path Cost displays the cost summary from this area to the destination area.
Adjacency Reference List Number contains the adjacency IDs usable for reaching the destination area.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
304 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Destination Systems
NSAP Address displays the NSAP of the destination system.
Path Cost displays the cost summary from this area to the destination area.
Adjacency Reference List Number contains the adjacency IDs usable for reaching the destination area.
Adjacencies displays all adjacencies to neighbours via Ethernet or DCC.
Linkage ID (only in case of a DCC adjacency) displays the internal ID number of the linkage.
Adjacency ID displays the internal ID number of the adjacency.
Neighbour SNPA (only in case of an Ethernet adjacency) displays the MAC address of the neighbour.
Neighbour System Type displays the Level 2 or Level 1 system type.
Neighbour System IDs
Displays the System IDs of the neighbour.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 305
28.2 MCF CLNS Performance
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Performance...
This window is used for displaying MCF CLNS performance information.
The counter values are displayed as: ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd (d means digit) to improve the readability.
IS-IS Level 1 Data Base Overload
Displays the overload state of this linkage for level 1 routing.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
306 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Display Meaning
Raised The level 1 routing data base is overloaded; the routing through this system is disturbed.
Cleared No overload
IS-IS Level 2 Data Base Overload
Displays the overload state of this linkage for level 2 routing.
Display Meaning
Raised The level 2 routing data base is overloaded; the routing through this system is disturbed.
Cleared No overload
Assembling Segments Discarded
Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered due to reassembly time expiry.
Congestion Discards
Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded due to congestion.
Error Reports Received
Displays the number of error report PDUs received, which were addressed to this NE.
Area Addresses Ignored
Displays the number of the manual area addresses dropped from the NE’s area, because the maximum number of area addresses inside the NE is reached.
Octets Received
Displays the total number of received user data octets.
Octets Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data octets.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 307
Other PDUs Discarded
Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded for any reason except congestion.
Segments Discarded
Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered for any reason except reassembly time expiry.
Segments Received
Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs received.
Segments Sent
Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs sent after segmentation processing occurs.
Upload Dump DB...
Opens a standard Save window to store data base parameters in the DumpDB.log file.
Upload Config Parameters...
Opens a standard Save window to store configuration parameters in the ConfigParameters.log file.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 309
29 MCF DCC
29.1 MCF DCC Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration...
In this window, you can create various connections between DCC channels and the VC-4 ports.
DCC List
The list contains 5 DCC channels and displays its connection state.
Display Meaning
OSI DCC Channel OSI DCC channel name
IP DCC Device IP DCC channel name
DCCM/DCCR Port <DCCM or DCCR type>_<slot number>.<port>
Connection State Possible values: DCCM; DCCR; free
Linkage State Possible values: Enabled / Disabled
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
310 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
New DCC Cross Connection
Set the type of DCC cross connection and select the MS/RS port from the Port List.
How to Configure DCC Cross Connections
Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 311
29.2 MCF DCC Linkage Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration...
Reachable Addresses
Fixed routes to other routing domains, called Reachable Address Prefixes, can be created and deleted here.
Configuration:
Traffic Mode
Select the traffic mode according to the planning data.
External Domain
Possible settings: Yes or No
yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. In this case the creation of RAP’s thru this linkage is strongly recommended; otherwise this linkage will not be used for communication to other NE’s.
no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default).
Level 1 Default Metric [1..63]
Cost for DCC channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
312 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Default = 1
Level 2 Default Metric [1..63]
Cost for DCC channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default = 1
T200 Time [200...2500 ms]
Value range: 200...2500 ms
Interface Type
Setting the interface for the local and remote NE. For a successful connection, the one NE must be set on Network and the other one to User.
Line Code
Displays the NRZ line code.
MCF Linkage State
Displays, whether the connection can be used (enabled) or not (disabled).
Note:
In Active NE state, it may be necessary to click Apply after every single parameter change.
The Add... button opens the DCC Reachable Address Add window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the DCC Reachable Address Modify window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Delete button removes the selected entry from the list.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 313
29.3 MCF DCC Linkage Performance
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a channel in the list) -> Performance...
Reject Adjacency
It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate memory capacity in the adjacent range.
Version Skew
If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of this version skew is increased.
ID Field Length Mismatch
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID Field Length Mismatch is increased.
Max. Area Address Mismatch
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max. Area Address Mismatch is increased.
Area Mismatch
If an adjacency cannot be initialized between two Level 1 ISs because of non-divisibility of a common range address, the value of this Area Mismatch is increased.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
314 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Octets Received
Displays the total number of received user data octets.
Octets Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data octets.
Frames Received
Displays the total number of received user data frames.
Frames Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data frames.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 315
29.4 Adding a Reachable DCC Address
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Add...
In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values (zero).
Configuration
Address Prefix
The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using this DCC linkage" (Hint: a DCC linkage never has a SNPA!)
- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed. - Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of another one.
Default Metric [1..63]
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default Metric Type
Possible values: Internal or External
The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible. If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be one.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
316 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g. different network providers).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 317
29.5 Modifying a Reachable DCC Address
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Modify...
In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values (zero).
Configuration:
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using this DCC linkage. In the modify window, this is in a read only mode." (Hint: a DCC linkage never has a SNPA!)
Default Metric [1..63]
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default Metric Type
Possible values: Internal or External
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g. different network providers).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
318 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
29.6 Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections
MSOH CPs in each Termination Point:
DCCM [combined CP for bytes (6,1,1), (6,4,1), (6,7,1), (7,1,1), (7,4,1), (7,7,1), (8,1,1), (8,4,1) and (8,7,1)]
HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (5,5,1), (5,6,1) and (5,8,1)] HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (7,5,1), (7,6,1) and (7,8,1)] HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (7,9,1), (8,2,1) and (8,3,1)] HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (8,5,1), (8,6,1) and (8,8,1)] HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (8,9,1), (9,8,1) and (9,9,1)]
HCOC9 [combined CP for bytes (5,9,1), (6,2,1), (6,3,1), (6,5,1), (6,6,1), (6,8,1), (6,9,1), (7,2,1) and (7,3,1)] HCOC9 [combined CP for bytes (7,9,1), (8,2,1), (8,3,1), (8,5,1), (8,6,1), (8,8,1), (8,9,1), (9,8,1) and (9,9,1)]
HCOC27 [combined CP for bytes (5,5,1), (5,6,1), (5,8,1), (5,9,1), (6,2,1), (6,3,1), (6,5,1), (6,6,1), (6,8,1), (6,9,1),(7,2,1), (7,3,1), (7,5,1), (7,6,1), (7,8,1), (7,9,1), (8,2,1), (8,3,1), (8,5,1), (8,6,1), (8,8,1), (8,9,1), (9,2,1), (9,3,1), (9,4,1), (9,8,1) and (9,9,1)]
MCF DCC Configuration
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 319
30 MCF Ethernet
30.1 MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration...
Reachable Addresses
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator.
SNPA Address
SNPA address of the reachable address entry (SNPA = MAC address).
Click Delete to clear existing addresses.
Configuration:
Traffic Mode
Select the traffic mode according to the planning data.
External Domain
Possible settings: No or Yes
yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. In this case the creation of RAP’s thru this linkage is strongly recommended; otherwise this linkage will not be used for communication to other NE’s.
no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default)."
L1/L2 Intermediate System Priority [1...127]
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
320 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Priority of the system for being selected as the designated IS on the sub network.
Level 1 Default Metric [1--63]
Cost for Ethernet channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default = 1
Level 2 Default Metric [1..63]
Cost for Ethernet channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default = 1
MAC Ethernet Address
Displays the MAC address used by the NE for this Ethernet linkage". (Hint: the MAC address is not configurable in the hiT70xx system).
MCF Linkage State
Linkage state is displayed.
The Add... button opens the Ethernet Reachable Address Add window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the Ethernet Reachable Address Modify window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Delete button removes the selected entry from the list.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 321
30.2 MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Performance...
Reject Adjacency
It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate memory capacity in the adjacent range.
Version Skew
If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of this version skew is increased.
ID Field Length Mismatch
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID Field Length Mismatch is increased.
Max. Area Addresses Mismatch
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max. Area Address Mismatch is increased.
Octets Received
Displays the total number of received user data octets.
Octets Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data octets.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
322 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Frames Received
Displays the total number of received user data frames.
Frames Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data frames.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 323
30.3 Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Add...
In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values (zero).
Configuration:
Address Prefix
The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator.
- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed. - Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of another one.
Default Metric [1..63]
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default Metric Type
Possible values: Internal or External
The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
324 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be one.
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g. different network providers).
SNPA Address
SNPA address of the reachable address entry.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 325
30.4 Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration... (by using the context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Modify...
In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing one. When the add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values (zero).
Configuration:
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator. In the modify window, this is in a read only mode.
Default Metric [1..63]
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default Metric Type
Possible values: Internal or External
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g. different network providers).
SNPA Address
SNPA address of the reachable address entry. In the modify window, this is in a read only mode.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 327
31 MCF OSI/IP
31.1 MCF IP over OSI Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / IP over OSI -> Configuration...
This window contains a checkbox for activating the tunneling and displays the Remote Tunnel NSAP and the Assigned IP Pseudo Interface.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
328 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
31.2 MCF OSI over IP Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration...
Reachable Addresses
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage" (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a SNPA!)
Configuration:
Activate Tunnel
Setting the checkbox for tunnel activation.
External Domain
Possible settings: No or Yes
yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. In this case the creation of RAP’s thru this linkage is strongly recommended; otherwise this linkage will not be used for communication to other NE’s.
no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default)."
Level 1 Default Metric [1--63]
Cost for channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 329
Default = 1
Level 2 Default Metric [1..63]
Cost for channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.
Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default = 1
Source IP Address
This address has to be fixed by the planning personnel.
Destination IP Address
This address has to be fixed by the planning personnel.
MCF Linkage State
Linkage state is displayed.
The Add... button opens the MCF OSI over IP Reachable Address Add window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the MCF OSI over IP Reachable Address Modify window.
After selecting an entry in the list, the Delete button removes the selected entry from the list.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
330 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
31.3 MCF OSI over IP Performance
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Performance...
Reject Adjacency
It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate memory capacity in the adjacent range.
Version Skew
If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of this version skew is increased.
ID Field Length Mismatch
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID Field Length Mismatch is increased.
Max. Area Address Mismatch
If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max. Area Address Mismatch is increased.
Octets Received
Displays the total number of received user data octets.
Octets Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data octets.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 331
Frames Received
Displays the total number of received user data frames.
Frames Sent
Displays the total number of sent user data frames.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
332 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
31.4 MCF OSI over IP, Adding a Reachable Address
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration... -> Add...
In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values (zero).
Configuration
Address Prefix
The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage" (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a SNPA!)
- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed. - Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of another one.
Default Metric [1..63]
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default Metric Type
Possible values: Internal or External
The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 333
If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be one.
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g. different network providers).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
334 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
31.5 MCF OSI over IP, Modifying a Reachable Address
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration... -> (with an entry selected in the Reachable Addresses list) -> Modify...
In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing one. When the add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values (zero).
Configuration:
Address Prefix
Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte) will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage. In the modify window, this is in a read only mode." (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a SNPA!)
Default Metric [1..63]
Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).
Default Metric Type
Possible values: Internal or External
Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g. different network providers).
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 335
32 IP Settings
32.1 IP Addresses Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP Addresses...
This window allows to configure the IP addresses for each DCN interface within the SURPASS hiT 7070.
Column Description
Index Unique identifier of the interface.
This index must be used also for identification of unnumbered links in OSPF configuration.
(Identifier = SNMP-index)
Interface Interface name.
Possible Interface names are :
eth0: for Ethernet Interface (unnumbered index 2)
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
336 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
lo:0: for Local loopback interface (unnumbered index 1)
dcc: Point-to-point interface over DCCM or DCCR. Each device could be configured as numbered or unnumbered interface
IP Address The local IP address of the interface.
The default value for the interface is 0.0.0.0 in this case the interface is not configured.
Once a local loopback address has been defined in the SURPASS hiT 7070, it is not possible any more to reset a configured IP address back to 0.0.0.0. If the address 0.0.0.0 is assigned, the NE assigns the address of lo:0 to this device. If the IP address of an interface is equal to the address of the local loopback interface lo:0 this interface is treated as unnumbered interface. If the IP address is not equal to the address of lo:0 or to the address of any other interface this interface is called a numbered interface. Every time that the operator tries to disable an IP interface by configuring its IP address to 0.0.0.0, the local loopback IP address will be set.
+ to disable IP on the interface set this interface to OSI only, using the "Linkage Config" window.
For Ethernet interface: SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF -> Ethernet -> Configuration, then select OSI.
For DCC interfaces: SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF -> DCC, then select a DCC interface and press the right-hand-mouse button, select "Configuration", then select OSI.
Subnet Mask Subnet mask associated with the IP address of this interface.
It defines the network that this interface belongs to. If OSPF is enabled on this interface the subnet mask has to be the same as set for the connected peer interface(s).
Dest IP Address The destination IP address of the interface referenced by the Index.
For the Ethernet interface the destination has to be the same as the source. For DCC links normally it is not necessary to enter any data in this field. The destination address will be learned via PPP protocol.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 337
Modify...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the IP Addresses Entry Modify window.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
338 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
32.2 IP Addresses Entry Modify
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP Addresses... -> Modify...
This window allows to modify a selected entry in the IP Addresses Config table.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 339
32.3 IP Static Routing Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing...
This window shows all the IP routes known by the SURPASS hiT 7070 and also allows to configure static routes manually.
Each known route has one entry (row) in the table. For each known route the following information is shown:
Column Description
Destination Destination IP address of this route.
Warning: The networks 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255 are reserved for internal purposes and should never be entered in this table.
Interface Name of the local interface through which the next hop of this route should be reached.
Metric [0..32766] Primary routing metric for this route.
Next Hop IP address of the next hop of this route.
Type Type of the route:
Direct
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
340 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The destination IP address is directly connected to the SURPASS hiT 7070 via the interface named in the "interface" column.
Indirect The destination IP address is reachable via the Next Hop IP address.
Invalid removes the route from the active routing process.
Protocol Routing mechanism via which this route was learned.
Mask Mask to be logically AND-ed with the destination address, before being compared to the value in the Destination field.
Add...
Opens the IP Static Routing Entry Add window.
Modify...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the IP Static Routing Entry Modify window.
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.
On deletion, the route will be first set to "Invalid" type.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 341
32.4 IP Static Routing Entry Add
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing... -> Add...
This window allows to add a new entry to the IP Static Routing Config table.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
342 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
32.5 IP Static Routing Entry Modify
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing... -> Modify...
This window allows to modify an existing entry in the IP Static Routing Config table.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 343
33 OSPF Settings
33.1 OSPF Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> OSPF...
This window allows to configure the OSPF routing in the SURPASS hiT 7070 (called "router" from now on).
OSPF Router ID
Identifier of the router (SURPASS hiT 7070) in the Autonomous System. The initial value is the IP Ethernet interface address of the router.
Enabled OSPF
The value Enabled (ticked on) means that OSPF is active. The value Disabled means that OSPF is inactive on all interfaces.
Note: Clicking Enabled OSPF returns "enabled" only if the OSPF Router ID is set and if at least one interface is configured with an area. In all other cases, "disabled" will be returned.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
344 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Autonomous System Border Router
Indication whether this router is an Autonomous System border router (ASBR). ASBRs propagate default routes only when these are entered.
Area Border Router
Indication whether this router is an area border router.
Information Fields:
External Link State Advertisements
Displays the number of external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements, which are currently stored in the link-state database.
Originated New Link State Advertisements
Displays the number of new link-state advertisements that have been originated by this router.
Received New Link State Advertisements
Displays the number of link-state advertisements received, determined to be new instantiations.
External LSA Checksum Summary
Displays the sum of the LSA checksums of the external link-state advertisements contained in the link-state database.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 345
33.2 OSPF Areas Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Areas handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070 ("router"). For each area handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070 there is a row in this table.
Column Description
Area Unique identifier of an area.
LSA Import Import mode selection for LSAs (Link State Advertisements). Used to configure stub areas.
SPF Runs The number of times that the intra-area route table has been calculated using this area's link state database.
Link State Advertisement (LSA)
This is an information field: displays the number of Link State Advertisements.
LSA Checksum Summary
This is an information field: displays the sum of the LSA link-state checksums contained in the link-state database of this area.
Area Summary Control of the import of summary LSAs into stub areas.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
346 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Modify...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Areas Entry Modify window.
Note:
No entries can be added to this table, it is built by the SURPASS hiT 7070 based on the OSPF areas known.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 347
33.3 OSPF Areas Entry Modify
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas... -> Modify...
This window allows to modify an existing entry in the OSPF Areas Config table.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
348 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
33.4 OSPF Area Metric Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Metric...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Area Metric.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 349
33.5 OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Aggregates...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Area Aggregates.
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration window is the OSPF Configuration .
Column Description
Area Area in which the Area Aggregate is to be found.
LSDB Type Type of the Area Aggregate.
Net Address The IP address of the network or sub-network indicated by the range.
Net Mask The sub-network mask that pertains to the network or sub-network.
Effect Sub-networks subsumed by ranges either trigger the advertisement of the indicated aggregate (advertise matching), or result in the sub-network not being
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
350 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
advertised at all outside the area.
Add...
Opens the OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add window.
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.
Note:
Configuration may cause a reboot on other SURPASS hiT 7070 / 7050 in the network.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 351
33.6 OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Aggregates... -> Add..
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration table.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
352 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
33.7 OSPF Interfaces Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces...
This window allows to configure the OSPF interfaces.
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Interfaces Configuration window is the OSPF Configuration
Column Description
Index Unique identifier of this interface. This is the index defined in the IP Address Table.
IP Address IP address of this interface.
State OSPF interface state: possible types are
For Ethernet Interface: Designated Router, Backup Designated Router Other Designated Router
For DCC Interfaces, Point to Point (PtP)
Events Number of times this OSPF interface has changed its state, or an error has occurred.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 353
Administrative State Status of OSPF for this interface (Enabled / Disabled).
Area Unique identifier of the area to which the interface connects.
Type OSPF interface type:
Broadcast (Ethernet interfaces). Point-to-Point (DCC interfaces)
The Loopback interface reads "unknown" in this table.
Designated Router IP address of the designated router in the LAN, if applicable.
Backup Designated Router
IP address of the backup designated router in the LAN, if applicable.
Router Priority [0..255] Priority of this interface for becoming Designated Router. Prio = "0" means excluded from becoming Designated Router.
Transit Delay [0..3600 s]
Estimated number of seconds to transmit a link-state update packet over this interface.
Retransmission Interval [0..3600 s]
Number of seconds between link-state advertisement retransmissions, for adjacencies belonging to this interface.
Hello Interval [1..65535 s]
Number of seconds between the Hello packets that the router sends on the interface.
Timeout [1..65535 s] Timeout interval.
Password Type Type of the password.
Password Password entry.
Add...
Opens the OSPF Interfaces Entry Add window
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.
Note:
No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
354 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
33.8 OSPF Interfaces Entry Add
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces... -> Add...
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF interfaces Config table.
Notes:
To add an unnumbered interface, select the index number of the interface defined in the IP Address table. The interface will then be identified with the Loopback address. The IP Address field is grayed out.
The IP address of the interface lo:0 and all unnumbered interface will only be advertised, if OSPF is enabled on lo:0. The fields that are left blank in this window, will automatically be configured to the default values:
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 355
Area Backbone Area
Router Priority 1
Transit Delay 1
Retransmission Interval 5
Hello Interval 10
Timeout 40
Password none
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
356 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
33.9 OSPF Interface Metric Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interface Metric...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Interface Metric.
Column Description
IP Address IP address of this OSPF interface.
Index Unique identifier of the interface to which this entry is applicable (see IP Address Table).
Metric Value [0..65535] Metric on this interface.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 357
33.10 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual Interfaces...
This window allows to configure the OSPF Virtual Interfaces.
Note:
A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration window is the OSPF Configuration .
Note:
If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link. No virtual interfaces can be defined through areas with unnumbered links.
Column Description
Area Transit area that the Virtual Link traverses.
Virtual Neighbour Router ID of the Virtual Neighbour.
State OSPF virtual interface state.
Events Number of state changes or error events on this Virtual Link.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
358 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Transit Delay [0..3600 s]
Estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link-state update packet over this interface.
Retransmission Interval [0..3600 s]
Number of seconds between link-state advertisement retransmissions, for adjacencies belonging to this interface.
Hello Interval [1..65535 s]
Number of seconds between the Hello packets that the router sends on the interface.
Timeout [1.. 2147483647 s]
Timeout interval. This timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).
Password Type Type of the password.
Password Password entry.
Add...
Opens the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add window.
Note:
Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values. The default value for timeout is 40 s, so it has to be changed manually.
The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).
Delete
If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.
Note: No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 359
33.11 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual Interfaces... -> Add...
This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Config list.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
360 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
33.12 OSPF Neighbours Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Neighbours...
This window displays information about OSPF neighbours. For each known neighbour there is one entry (row) in this table.
Column Description
IP Address IP address of this neighbour.
Index On an interface having an IP address: zero.
On unnumbered interfaces, the corresponding value of the Index in the Internet Standard MIB.
Neighbour Router ID Unique identifier of the neighbour router in the Autonomous System.
LSA Import LSA import state with this neighbour (OFF/ON).
Type-of-Service Routing
Type-of-Service Routing state with this neighbour (OFF/ON).
Neighbour Priority [0..255]
Priority of this neighbour in the designated router selection algorithm.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 361
State State of the relationship with this neighbour.
Events Number of times this neighbour relationship has changed state, or an error has occurred.
Retransmission Queue Length
Current length of the retransmission queue.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
362 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
33.13 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual Neighbours...
This window displays information about OSPF Virtual Neighbours.
Note:
If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link.
Column Description
Area Transit area identifier.
IP Address IP address of this virtual neighbour.
Virtual Neighbour Router ID
Unique identifier of the virtual neighbour router.
LSA Import LSA import state with this virtual neighbour (OFF/ON).
Type-of-Service Routing
Type-of-Service Routing state with this virtual neighbour (OFF/ON).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 363
State State of the relationship with this virtual neighbour.
Events Number of times this virtual neighbour relationship has changed state, or an error has occurred.
Retransmission Queue Length
Current length of the retransmission queue.
Hello Suppressed Indicator whether Hellos are being suppressed to the neighbour.
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details window.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
364 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
33.14 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual Neighbours... -> Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the Virtual Neighbours Info list.
Notes:
The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s). The default value for timeout is 40 s, so it has to be changed manually.
Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 365
33.15 OSPF LSDB Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB...
This window displays information about the Link State Database of the SURPASS hiT 7070. For each LSA in the database, there is one row in this table.
Column Description
Area Identifier of the Area from which the LSA was received.
Type Type of the Link State Advertisement.
Link State ID Either a Router ID or an IP Address.
LSDB Router ID Unique identifier of the originating router in the Autonomous System.
Sequence Sequence number.
Age [s] Age of the link state advertisement in seconds.
Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement, excepting the age field.
Link State Advertisement (LSA)
Number of Link State Advertisements.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
366 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF LSDB Entry Details window.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 367
33.16 OSPF LSDB Entry Details
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB... -> Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF LSDB Info list.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
368 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
33.17 OSPF External LSDB Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB...
This window displays information about the external LSA database in the SURPASS hiT 7070.
Column Description
Type Type of the external Link State Advertisement.
Link State ID Either a Router ID or an IP Address.
Ext LSDB Router ID Unique identifier of the originating external router.
Sequence Sequence number.
Age [s] Age of the external link state advertisement in seconds.
Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement, excepting the Age field.
Ext Link State Advertisement
Number of external Link State Advertisements.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 369
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF External LSDB Entry Details window
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
370 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
33.18 OSPF External LSDB Entry Details
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB... -> Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF EXT LSDB Info list.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 371
34 TCP Settings
34.1 TCP Connections Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> TCP Connections...
This window displays information about the listening TCP ports in the SURPASS hiT 7070 and all the currently established TCP connections.
There is one row in this table for each open TCP port in the SURPASS hiT 7070.
Column Description
State State of this TCP port: Port is in Listening mode or a TCP connection is established.
Local Address Local IP address for this TCP connection.
Local Port Local port number for this TCP connection.
Remote Address Remote IP address for this TCP connection.
Remote Port Remote port number for this TCP connection.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
372 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Details...
If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the TCP Connections Entry Details window.
Notes:
All ports in the SURPASS hiT 7070 are displayed in this table, including the ports used internally.
The TCP connections which are established with TNMS systems (for management) can also be displayed via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport connections -> Information....
Here the IP connections can be identified by a 17-byte NSAP-like address which starts with "54" and contains the IP address, e.g. 540072872203XXXXXXXXXXXX0100001.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 373
34.2 TCP Connections Entry Details
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> TCP Connections... -> Details...
This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the TCP Connections Info list.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 375
35 Data
35.1 Subrack Data
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the Subrack symbol -> Subrack Data...
Customer Specific tab:
In the Customer Specific tab, the customer can enter specific inventory data of the subrack. Value range: 0...128 characters
Vendor Specific tab:
The Vendor Specific tab is read-only, displaying vendor specific inventory data of the subrack.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
376 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
35.2 ASIC Data Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol -> Information -> ASIC Data...
This window gives information about the ASIC(s) on the card.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 377
35.3 Copy Data
This window is accessible via the port connections (after clicking the symbol an interface card or packet switch fabric card in the Module View), by using the context menu of a symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data... (or repeatedly Subview -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data..., if applicable)
With this window, you can transfer alarm and data configurations of a AU4 or VCn to one or more other objects of the same type, i.e. either from one card to another or object configurations within the same card
Note:
Copy Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping of the subrack).
Copy Items
This area allows to select the configuration types to be copied:
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
378 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Alarm configurations
Traffic configurations (not with AU4 traffic flow symbols)
Performance configurations (not with E12 and E3 traffic flow symbols)
Copy Units
This area displays the source to be copied, and allows to select the target(s). At least one target must be selected. To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to select all entries in the list.
Copy Card Data
How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 379
35.4 Copy Card Data
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol (except SCOH and CLU) -> Copy Card Data...
This window allows to transfer data configurations of a card to one or more other empty equivalent slots.
Note:
Copy Card Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).
Copy Units
This area displays the source to be copied, and allows to select the target(s). At least one target must be selected. To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to select all entries in the list.
Copy Data
How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
380 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
35.5 DB Management Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Config DB Management...
In this window, you can configure DB management (VCDB) settings.
The VCDB contains the complete configuration data for the NE, stored in the SCOH drawer in a non-volatile memory.
You can save the current VCDB for future use, by uploading it to the LCT/NCT or OS. You can revert to that VCDB by downloading it from the LCT/NCT or OS, e. g. in case of a card/software change or failure.
NE State
The NE State can be set to Active or Idle.
Active Config DB:
Configuration ID
Wrap-around counter which is increased on each persistent configuration change.
Config DB Action
Possible Settings:
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 381
NE State Config DB Action
Active no
Idle no
Set to Default Config DB
Set to Previous Config DB
How to Download VCDB Files
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
382 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
35.6 DB Download Dialog
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Config DB Management... (with NE State set to "idle") -> Download... -> (in the opened window, select the relevant file) -> Open.
This window allows to control and monitor the DB download process.
By pressing the Start button, the download process begins.
By pressing the Stop button, the download process can be terminated.
Note: A stop of the download will cause a SCOH reboot, which does not affect the traffic.
How to Download VCDB Files
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 383
35.7 DB Upload Dialog
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Config DB Management... -> Upload... -> (in the opened window, enter the file name) -> Save.
This window allows to control and monitor the DB upload process.
By pressing the Start button, the upload process begins.
By pressing the Stop button, the upload process can be terminated.
Note:
In case of DB upload, all empty slots will be set to Empty-Auto provisioning state, even if configured to Empty before.
How to Upload VCDB Files
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
384 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
35.8 NE Logs Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Logs... -> NE Logs...
Configuration Log tab:
The list contains one entry for each single configuration change.
Click the column header to sort the column.
If an list entry is selected, the Show Details... button opens the Log Records Attribute window.
Historical Event Log tab:
The list contains one entry (one single line) for each single alarm of the requested historical event log.
Click the column header to sort the column.
Both NE logs can be saved using the Save button in the tool bar
or via the File -> Save as... command in the Main Menu.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 385
35.9 Log Records Attribute
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Logs... -> NE Logs... (in the NE Logs Info window, Configuration Log tab, select an object) -> Show Details...
This window displays details of the selected object.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
386 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
35.10 Copy to Permanent MACs
A very quick copy process window appears.
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 port symbol -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration... -> Learned MACs tab -> Copy to Permanent button
This window shows the progress bar, symbolizing the copying process from the Learned MACs list to the Permanent MACs list.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 387
36 Performance
36.1 Ethernet Packet Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an Ethernet card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Performance -> Packets...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
388 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The rows in the table display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when ETH performance monitoring is enabled. If ETH performance monitoring is disabled, the current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.
Display Meaning
Value Date, time, TMP and frames of the current interval
Current 15min Corresponding entries
Current 24h Corresponding entries
Tx Incoming ETH traffic
Rx Outgoing ETH traffic
TMP Elapsed time in the interval.
Lost Frames Queue Overflow Rx If the flow control is disabled and the input traffic exceeds the VC capacity or the value of the admission control, there will be lost frames. So the corrupt frames are counted.
Multicast Frames Pause frames which are triggered by the flow control, are counted as well.
Bad Frames CrC Error Rx Corrupted frames which enter the port.
Dropped Frames Tx Frames which are coming from the SDH side, and are being dropped. This may have the following reasons: The port is set to multichannel, the opposite side sends without being set to multichannel mode, or vice versa. The GFP Assignment ID (Extension header) is wrong. Frames coming from SDH side are corrupted because of signal degrade.
Invalid VLAN or Untagged Frames (in case of IFQGBEB or IFQGBEB-E in VLAN modes) Frames received at the gigabit port in downstream direction tagged with a VLAN ID not assigned (unknown) to any downlink GFP channel or that are untagged.
Note: To see the current state, you need to push the Update button.
Previous 15 min tab:
The tab contains packet statistics, which were obtained within a 15 min interval. The last 16 measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the oldest entry.
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 389
Previous 24 h tab:
The tab contains packet statistics that were obtained within a 24 h interval. The last 3 measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the oldest entry. 15 min intervals are also contained in the list.
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
390 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
36.2 AU4 PJE Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n -> Performance -> AU4 PJE...
This window contains a tab control with three cards: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
Current
The rows in this field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when AU4 performance monitoring is enabled. If AU4 performance monitoring is disabled, the current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval
Time Time of the current interval
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds)
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 391
-PJE The negative pointer actions are counted
+PJE The positive pointer actions are counted
Previous 15 min tab:
The tab contains a list of pointer actions that occurred within a 15 min and 24 h interval. The last 16 measuring intervals are displayed. Further entries overwrite the oldest entry.
Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 24 h tab:
The tab contains a list of pointer actions that occurred within a 24 h (also 15 min) interval. The last 3 measuring intervals are displayed. Further entries overwrite the oldest entries. 15 min intervals are also contained in the list.
Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
392 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
36.3 STM-64 Gauge Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IFS10G card symbol -> Subview... -> STM-64 -> Performance -> OS Near End Gauge...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 393
Enable TCA Monitoring
If the checkbox is cleared:
The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled. The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn’t depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection.
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval.
Time Time of the current interval.
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).
Avg. BER Average BER of the current interval
Max. BER Maximal BER within the current interval
Available Time Time within the current interval
TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h:
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper threshold or Lower threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately when the Upper threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the Lower threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper threshold. The TCA is raised immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
394 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA Threshold Range:
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold identically for near and far end.
Previous 15 min tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 395
36.4 MSTTP Near End Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> MS Near End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals
If the checkbox is cleared:
The current 15 min values are deleted
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
396 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled. The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection.
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval.
Time Time of the current interval.
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting, the BBE counter is frozen.
ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error) has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has occurred.
Layer Threshold
VC2 30%
VC3 30%
VC4 30%
VC12 30%
STM-1 RS-Layer 30%
STM-1 MS-Layer 15%
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 397
STM-4 RS-Layer 50%
STM-4 MS-Layer 25%
STM-16 RS-Layer 75%
STM-16 MS-Layer 30%
STM-64 RS-Layer 40%
STM-64 MS-Layer 30%
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.
TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
TCA Threshold Range:
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold identically for near and far end.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
398 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Previous 15 min tab:
Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 399
36.5 MSTTP Far End Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> MS Far End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals
If the checkbox is cleared:
The current 15 min values are deleted
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
400 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled. The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection.
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval.
Time Time of the current interval.
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting, the BBE counter is frozen.
ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error) has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has occurred.
Layer Threshold
VC2 30%
VC3 30%
VC4 30%
VC12 30%
STM-1 RS-Layer 30%
STM-1 MS-Layer 15%
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 401
STM-4 RS-Layer 50%
STM-4 MS-Layer 25%
STM-16 RS-Layer 75%
STM-16 MS-Layer 30%
STM-64 RS-Layer 40%
STM-64 MS-Layer 30%
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.
TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
TCA Threshold Range:
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold identically for near and far end.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
402 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Previous 15 min tab:
Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 403
36.6 RSTTP Near End Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> RS Near End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals
If the checkbox is cleared:
The current 15 min values are deleted
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
404 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled. The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn’t depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection.
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval.
Time Time of the current interval.
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting, the BBE counter is frozen.
ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the number of Ebs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error) has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has occurred.
Layer Threshold
VC2 30%
VC3 30%
VC4 30%
VC12 30%
STM-1 RS-Layer 30%
STM-1 MS-Layer 15%
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 405
STM-4 RS-Layer 50%
STM-4 MS-Layer 25%
STM-16 RS-Layer 75%
STM-16 MS-Layer 30%
STM-64 RS-Layer 40%
STM-64 MS-Layer 30%
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.
TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
TCA Threshold Range:
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold identically for near and far end.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
406 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Previous 15 min tab:
Clear All Previous Values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Clear All Previous Values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 407
36.7 VCCTP Near End Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an SDH interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n -> Performance -> Near End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
The errors/defects which are detected from the CTP of its own.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
Note:
The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
408 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals
If the checkbox is cleared:
The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled. The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection.
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval.
Time Time of the current interval.
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting, the BBE counter is frozen.
ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error) has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 409
TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
TCA Threshold Range:
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold identically for near and far end.
Previous 15 min tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
410 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 411
36.8 VCCTP Far End Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an SDH interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n -> Performance -> Far End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
The errors/defects which are detected from the far NE and send via G1/V5 byte.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
Note:
The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
412 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals.
If the checkbox is cleared:
The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.
Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled. The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection.
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval.
Time Time of the current interval.
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting, the BBE counter is frozen.
ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error) has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 413
TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
TCA Threshold Range:
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold identically for near and far end.
Previous 15 min tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
414 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 415
36.9 VCTTP Near End Performance
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, e.g. by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a VC4 #n symbol) -> Performance -> Near End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
Note:
The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
416 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
If the checkbox is cleared:
The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled. The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection.
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval.
Time Time of the current interval.
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting, the BBE counter is frozen.
ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error) has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 417
TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
TCA Threshold Range:
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold identically for near and far end.
Previous 15 min tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
418 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 419
36.10 VCTTP Far End Performance
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, e.g. by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a VC4 #n symbol) -> Performance -> Far End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
Note:
The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
420 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
If the checkbox is cleared:
The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled. The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection.
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval.
Time Time of the current interval.
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting, the BBE counter is frozen.
ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error) has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 421
TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS fields.
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark grey color.
TCA Threshold Range:
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold identically for near and far end.
Previous 15 min tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
422 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 423
36.11 VC12 Near End Performance
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol -> Subview... -> VC12 -> Performance... -> Near End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals
If the checkbox is cleared:
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
424 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled. The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection:
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval.
Time Time of the current interval.
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting, the BBE counter is frozen.
ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error) has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.
TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS fields.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 425
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
TCA Threshold Range:
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold identically for near and far end.
Previous 15 min tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
426 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 427
36.12 VC12 Far End Performance
This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol -> Subview... -> VC12 -> Performance... -> Far End...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals
If the checkbox is cleared:
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
428 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.
The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab
Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled. The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn’t depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection:
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval.
Time Time of the current interval.
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).
BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting, the BBE counter is frozen.
ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.
SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the number of Ebs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error) has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.
UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10 consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the other counters are frozen.
TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:
Monitoring enabled
Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS fields.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 429
If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value, the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.
If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA alarm is cleared.
TCA 15 min
The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.
TCA 24 h
The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.
TCA UAT
The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.
TCA Threshold Range:
The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold identically for near and far end.
Previous 15 min tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 15 min
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records
Previous 24 h
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
430 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 431
36.13 GFP Frames Performance
This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality State : VLAN C -> Apply In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> GFP Group #n -> Performance -> GFP Frames...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
432 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The rows in the table display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when ETH performance monitoring is enabled. If ETH performance monitoring is disabled, the current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval
Time Time of the current interval
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds)
Dropped Frames Tx Discarded downstream frames due to queue overflow. (i.e. tagged ethernet downstream on gigabit uplink exceeding its assigned VC capacity) One counter per GFP group, accumulating all contained GFP channels.
Dropped Frames Rx Transferred downstream ethernet frames from gigabit uplink towards assigned downlink VC. One counter per GFP group, accumulating all contained GFP channels.
Average Throughput Rx [bytes/s]
Average throughput of transferred downstream bytes of ethernet frames in the passed measuring interval.
Previous 15 min tab:
The tab contains packet statistics, which where obtained within a 15 min interval. The last 16 measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the last entry.
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Previous 24 h tab:
The tab contains packet statistics, which where obtained within a 24 h interval. The last 3 measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the last entry. 15 min intervals are also contained in the list.
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 433
37 IF7FE2GEL2 card
37.1 IF7FE2GEL2 - System Config
L2 Switch tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select L2 Switch tab).
General
System MAC address
Burned-In MAC Address in Hexadecimal Format
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
434 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Tunneling MAC Address
The Tunneling Mac Address used for Trasparent Transport Of Customer BPDUs.
Aging Timeout
The FDB entry's address aging timeout (in seconds).
Tag Protocol Interface
Enable protocol identifier selection, the value indicates that the frame carries the protocol tag information
Rate Mode
********
GARP
Enable GVRP
The administrative status requested by management for GVRP. The value enabled (1) indicates that GVRP should be enabled on this device, on all ports for which it has not been specifically disabled. When disabled (2), GVRP is disabled on all ports and all GVRP packets will be forwarded transparently.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Enable GMRP
The administrative status requested by management for GMRP. The value enabled(1) indicates that GMRP should be enabled on this device, in all VLANs, on all ports for which it has not been specifically disabled. When disabled(2), GMRP is disabled, in all VLANs, on all ports and all GMRP packets will be forwarded transparently.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 435
Broadcast tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Broadcast tab).
Broadcast mode
The item allows to disable or to enable three different broadcast storm recovery modes
- no broadcast storm (NoBS)
- Switch wide broadcast storm control (SwW)
- Per port broadcast storm control (PBS)
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
436 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
- Per port bandwith policing (PBwP)
Switch Wide Limit
This item store the limit to be used switch wide (i.e. on all the ports)
Due to the Purple limitation no more than 8 items can be created . This value can be setup in 64 Kbps steps up to the port capacity (10 , 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps)
Broadcast ID/ Policing ID
This object represents an istance out of 8 policing values in this table
Broadcast Storm Rate / Policing rate
This table store committed broadcast storm rate value over witch the exceeding broadcast packets are discarded. This table store committed policing rate values. This is the sstained rate permitted by policing.
Due to the Purple limitation no more than 8 items can be created . This value can be setup in 64 Kbps steps up to the port capacity (10 , 100 Mbps or 1 Gbps)
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 437
STP tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select STP tab).
Spanning Tree Protocol Enabled
Spanning tree operational status on the switch.
1: Checked / Enabled
2: Unchecked / Disabled
Force Version
The MST configuration force protocol version.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
438 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
1: STP
2: Rapid STP
3: Multi STP
MST Region Name
The MST configuration name of at most 32 characters.
Revision
The MST configuration revision. The default value is 1.
Digest Key
The MST configuration digest key.
Value as Hexadecimal.
Format Selector
The MST configuration format selector. A value different from 0 (zero) indicates non-support for the IEEE 802.1s standard is not supported.
The MST tab is only available when the Force Version has the value Multi STP
If the Spanning Tree Protocol Enabled is enable and the user wants to change the Force Version, then a Warning message "For Configuring the STP Force Version you must disable STP Globally Enabled first!" will be shown.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 439
CST tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select CST tab).
CONFIG
Bridge Hello Time [1..10 s]
The MSTP bridge hello time for the CIST. The default value is 2.
Bridge Forward Delay [4..30 s]
The MSTP bridge forward delay for the CIST. The default value is 15.
Bridge Max Age
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
440 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The MSTP bridge max age for the CIST.
Rules:
2 * (BHT + 1) <= BMA <= 2 * (BFD - 1)
BHT - Bridge Hello Time
BMA - Bridge Max Age
BFD - Bridge Forward Delay
Bridge Priority
The MSTP bridge priority in a specific instance. The priority is in the increments of 4096. The recommended default value is 32768.
0 | 4096 | 8192 | 12288 | 16384 | 20480 | 24576 | 28672 | 32768 | 36864 | 40960 | 45056 | 49152 | 53248 | 57344 | 61440
Status
Max Age [s]
The MSTP root port max age for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.
Forward Delay [s]
The MSTP root port forward delay for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.
Hello Time [s]
The amount of time between the transmission of Configuration bridge PDUs by this node on any port when it is the root of the spanning tree or trying to become so, in units of hundredths of a second.
Bridge Hold Time [s]
The MSTP bridge hold time for the CIST, in units of hundredths of a second.
CST Regional Root ID
The MSTP regional root identifier for the CIST.
Hexadecimal format.
Regional Root Path Cost
The MSTP regional root path cost for the CIST.
Bridge ID
The MSTP bridge identifier for this CIST.
Hexadecimal format.
Time Since Topology Change
The MSTP time since the last topology change for this CIST.
It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Topology Change Count
The MSTP count of topology changes for this CIST.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 441
Topology Change Parameter
The MSTP topology change parameter for this CIST.
1: True
2: False
Root Port ID
The MSTP root port ID for this CIST.
Hexadecimal format.
Designated Root ID
The MSTP designated root bridge identifier for this CIST.
Hexadecimal format.
Root Path Cost
The MSTP root path cost for this CIST.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
442 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
MST tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab).
MST ID [1..4094]
The MSTP instance ID.
Range: 1..4094
Bridge Priority [0.61440]
The MSTP bridge priority in a specific instance. The priority is in the increments of 4096. The recommended default value is 32768.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 443
Bridge ID
The MSTP bridge identifier in a specific instance.
Hexadecimal Value
Designated Root ID
The MSTP designated root bridge identifier.
Hexadecimal Value.
Root Path Cost
The MSTP root path cost.
Value as delivered.
Root Port ID
The MSTP root port ID.
Hexadecimal Value.
Time Since Topology Change
The MSTP time since the last topology change.
It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Topology Change Count
The MSTP count of topology changes.
Topology Change Parameter
The MSTP topology change parameter.
Value
1: True
2: False
VLANs
The NSTP VLAN-IDs list.
String with the VLAN-IDs separated by ";"
Buttons Function
Add…
Opens the MST Entry Add window.
Modify
Only visible if an entry in the MST Grid is selected.
Delete
Only visible if an entry in the MST Table is selected. Deletes the selected Entry.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
444 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Opens the message box "Delete selected MST Entry?" on delete.
IGMP Snooping tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select IGMP Snooping tab).
IGMP Snooping Enabled
This enables or disables IGMP Snooping on the system. Default values is disabled
1: Checked /Enabled
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 445
2: Unchecked / Disabled
Interval
IGMP group interval time on the system. This is time that the switch will wait before deleting the interface from the entry because it do not receive a report from a particular interface. Default value is 260s. Range 1:3600
Max Response Time
It is possible to configure the IGMP snooping max response time for the system. The max response time is the time that the switch will wait after sending a query in an interface because it does not receive a report from a particular group in that interface. Default value is 10s . Range 1:3600
Expiration time
It is possible to configure the IGMP snooping max expiration time. It is the time that the switch will wait for a query to be received on an interface before the interface is removed from the list of the interface with a multicast routers attached. Default value is 0s. Range 0:3600
Multicast Control Frames Processed
Multicast Control Frames Processed by the CPU. The number of multicast control frames that have been processed by the CPU
Port IGMP Snooping Disabled
Shows all available Ports configured in this card.
Port IGMP Snooping Enabled
LCT / OS can configure the IGMP Snooping operation per port. The value enable indicates that IGMP Snooping is enable on this port in all VLAs . A value disable indicates that IGMP Snooping is disabled on the port in all VLANs.
Show the selected Available Ports. Multiple selection supported.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
446 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
COS tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select COS tab).
User Priority
The default ingress User Priority for this port.
A table that contains information about the 802.1p prioeity mapping to traffic class priority queue for every physical port.
User Priority [0..7]
Traffic Class [0..3]
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 447
Traffic class priority queue the received frame is mapped to.
VLAN Translation tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Translation tab).
VLAN Change Mode
The item allows to disable or to enable such different VLAN change modes
No Change (NoCh)
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
448 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Per VLANID change (Vch)
Per port change (Pch)
Per port and per VLAN ID change (PVCh)
VLAN ID
The VLAN-ID or other identifier refering to this VLAN.
Egress VLAN Id
The set of ports which are permanently assigned to the egress list for this VLAN by management.
VLAN Priority tab
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 449
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority tab).
VLAN ID
The VLAN-ID or other identifier refering to this VLAN.
VLAN Mode
It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure the mode of operation for a VLAN Id.
Trap tab
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
450 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Trap tab).
Link Up/Down
Link Up/Link Down traps for the entire switch.
values
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Spanning Tree
This flag enables the sending of new root traps and topology change notification traps.
values
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 451
Mirroring tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select Mirroring tab).
Mirroring Mode
Port mirroring mode:
Enable : enable mirroring mode
Disable : disable mirroring mode
Delete : clear mirrored port and probe
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
452 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Port configuration : shows the probe port
Probe Port
Shows the probe port
Mirrored Port
Shows the mirrored port.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 453
37.2 IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry add
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab) -> Add push-button.
MST ID
The MSTP instance ID
Range: 1..4094
VLANs
Available
Shows all VLANs currently configured into the device by management, or dynamically created as a result of GVRP requests received.
Multiple selection supported.
Selected
Multiple selection supported.
Note
The maximum number of entrys in the MST is 4. When the user trys to set a 5th entry, a warning message "Only 4 MST IDs are allowed!" is shown.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
454 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
When the user changes the value "Multi STP" in the Field Force Version, in the L2 Switch Tab, this window closes.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 455
37.3 IF7FE2GEL2 - MST Entry Modify
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select MST tab) -> select on entry -> Modify push-button.
MST ID
The MSTP instance ID
Range: 1..4094
VLANs
Available
Shows all VLANs currently configured into the device by management, or dynamically created as a result of GVRP requests received.
Multiple selection supported.
Selected
Multiple selection supported.
Note
The maximum number of entrys in the MST is 4. When the user trys to set a 5th entry, a warning message "Only 4 MST IDs are allowed!" is shown.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
456 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
When the user changes the value "Multi STP" in the Field Force Version, in the L2 Switch Tab, this window closes.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 457
37.4 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Add
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority) -> Add push-button.
Priority ID
It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure different priority Mapping based on VLAN Mode configured per VLAN
Priority In Pri Based
The incoming priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer priority
Priority Tos Based
The IP TOS value of the incoming packet which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer priority
Priority VLAN In Based
The outgoing priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure mapped to different value based on Priority Mode
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
458 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.5 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Priority Entry Modify
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Configuration... -> (select VLAN Priority) -> select an entry row -> Modify push-button.
Port VLAN ID [1..4094]
The PVID, the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this port.
Priority ID
It is possible via LCT/TNMS to configure different priority Mapping based on VLAN Mode configured per VLAN
Priority In Pri Based
The incoming priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer priority
Priority Tos Based
The IP TOS value of the incoming packet which LCT/TNMS will configure to map it to outer priority
Priority VLAN In Based
The outgoing priority of the VLAN tag which LCT/TNMS will configure mapped to different value based on Priority Mode
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 459
Status
The status of Vlan Priority Map Entry
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
460 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.6 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Config
Permanent MAC’s tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select Permanent MACs tab).
PERMANENT MACS
The switch’s static Mac filtering table
VLAN ID
The Static MAC Filter Vlan Id.
MAC Address
The Static MAC Filter MAC address.
Destination Port Names
The Static MAC Filter destination port mask.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 461
Learned MAC’s tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select Learned MACs tab).
Learned MACs
The Multicast Forwarding Database Table.
VLAN ID
Vlan Index for which this entry is associated with.
Value as Delivered.
MAC Address
A unicast MAC address for which the device has forwarding and/or filtering information.
Port Name
Either the value '0', or the port number of the port on which a frame having a source address equal to the value of the corresponding instance of Address has been seen.
String with the port name or "0".
Status
The status of this entry.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
462 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
1: Other
2: Invalid
3: Learned
4: Self
5: Mgmt
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 463
37.7 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Add
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> Add push-button.
VLAN ID
The Static MAC Filter Vlan ID.
MAC Address
The Static MAC Filter MAC address.
Destination Ports
Shows all possible Destination ports configured in this card.
Note:
The value in the Field MAC Address is checked and if is invalid a error Message "Wrong MAC Address! The first byte of the Adress must be even for Unicast Addresses."
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
464 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.8 IF7FE2GEL2 - Unicast MACs Entry Modify
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Unicast MACs -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push-button.
VLAN ID
The Static MAC Filter Vlan ID.
Destination Ports
Shows all possible Destination ports configured in this card.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 465
37.9 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Config
Permanent MACs tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Permanent MACs tab.
PERMANENT MACS
The switch's static Mac filtering table
VLAN ID
Vlan Index for which this entry is associated with.
Value as Delivered.
MAC Address
A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information.
Destination Port
Shows all possible Destination ports configured in this card.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
466 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Registered MACs tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Registered MACs tab.
Registered MACs
The Multicast Forwarding Database table
VLAN ID
Vlan Index for which this entry is associated with.
MAC Address
A multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering information.
Protocol
The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding Database.
1: Static
2: GMRP
3: IGMP
Type
This displays the type of the entry.
1: Static
2: Dinamic
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 467
Description
Text description of this multicast table entry.
Forward Ports
BitMask indicating which ports this entry indicates should be forwarded.
Filter Ports
BitMask indicating which ports this entry indicates should be filtered.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
468 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.10 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Add
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: : Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> Add push-button.
VLAN ID
The Static MAC Filter Vlan Id.
MAC Address
The Static MAC Filter MAC address.
Destination Ports
Available : Shows all possible Destination Ports configured in this card.
Selected : Shows the selected Destination Ports.
When setting this value, the system will ignore configuration for ports not between the first and last valid ports. Configuration of any port numbers between this range that are not valid ports return a failure message, but will still apply configuration for valid ports.
Multiple selection supported.
Note:
The value in the Field MAC Address is checked and if is invalid a error Message "Wrong MAC Address! The first byte of the Adress must be odd for Multicast Addresses."
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 469
37.11 IF7FE2GEL2 - Multicast MACs Entry Modify
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Multicast MACs... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push-button.
VLAN ID
The Static MAC Filter Vlan Id.
Destination Ports
Available : Shows all possible Destination Ports configured in this card.
Selected : Shows the selected Destination Ports.
When setting this value, the system will ignore configuration for ports not between the first and last valid ports. Configuration of any port numbers between this range that are not valid ports return a failure message, but will still apply configuration for valid ports.
Multiple selection supported.
Note:
The value in the Field MAC Address is checked and if is invalid a error Message "Wrong MAC Address! The first byte of the Adress must be odd for Multicast Addresses."
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
470 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.12 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port config
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports...
A list of interface entries.
Port Name
A unique value for each interface.
MAC Address
A Multicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering information.
Administrative Status
The desired state of the interface.
1: Up
2: Down
3: Testing
Operational Status
The current operational state of the interface.
1: Up
2: Down
3: Testing
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 471
Port VLAN ID [1..4094]
The PVID, the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this port.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
472 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.13 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Management Config
General tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> General tab.
GENERAL
802.3ad LACP Mode
Enable/disable 802.3ad LACP on this port.
Values
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Administrative Mode
The switch's Port Admin Mode.
Local Ports:
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Logical Ports:
1: Enabled
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 473
2: Disabled
Auto-Negotiation
This object identifies the administration status of auto negotiation for this port.
Freeze MAC Address Learning
Manager can freeze all the dynamically learned MAC addresses assocated to a port, and stop the learning mode on this port.
1: Freeze
2: Unfreeze
Double VLAN Tag Mode
Controls the Double Vlan Tag mode on this port.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
Double VLAN Tag Customer ID [0..4095]
Configures the Customer ID for the Double Vlan Tag for this port.
Range: 0..4095
Maximum Frame Size
This object identifies the largest value that can be configured for agentPortMaxFrameSize.
Enable Maximum Frame Size
This object identifies the currently configured maximum frame size value for this port. The maximum value that this object can be set to is the value of agentPortMaxFrameSizeLimit.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
474 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
VLAN tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> VLAN tab.
VLAN
Port VLAN ID [1..4094]
The PVID, the VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this port.
Range: 2..4094
Acceptable Frames Filtering
When this is admitOnlyVlanTagged (2) the device will discard untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this port. When admitAll(1), untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this port will be accepted and assigned to the PVID for this port.
1: Admit all
2: Admit only VLAN tagged
Default User Priority [0..7]
The default ingress User Priority for this port.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 475
GVRP/GMRP tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> GVRP/GMRP tab.
GVRP/GMRP
GVRP Port Status
The administrative state of GMRP operation on this port. The value enabled (1) indicates that GMRP is enabled on this port in all VLANs as long as dot1dGmrpStatus is also enabled (1). A value of disabled(2) indicates that GMRP is disabled on this port in all VLANs: any GMRP packet received will be silently discarded and no GMRP registrations will be propagated from other ports.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
GMRP Port Status
The state of GVRP operation on this port. The value enabled (1) indicates that GVRP is enabled on this port, as long as dot1qGvrpStatus is also enabled for this device. When disabled (2) but dot1qGvrpStatus is still enabled for the device, GVRP is disabled on this port:
1: Checked
2: Unchecked
GARP TIMERS
Join Time [1..100 cs]
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
476 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
A table of GARP control information about every bridge port.
Range: 1..100
Leave Time [20..600 cs]
The GARP Leave time, in centiseconds.
Range: 20..600
Leave All Time [200..6000 cs]
The GARP LeaveAll time, in centiseconds.
Range: 200..6000
STP tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> STP tab.
STP
STP Port State
The administrative STP state for the port.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 477
The default port STP state is enabled for the first 4095 ports and disabled for any ports beyond.
1: Checked / Enabled
2: Unchecked / Disabled
Port Up Time Since Counter were Cleared
Time since port was reset. It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Note: For a correct handling of LAG, the STP should be enabled on the involved ports.
CST tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> CST tab.
CONFIG
Edge State
The administrative state of a specific port in CIST.
1: Checked
2: Unchecked.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
478 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The default port state is disabled.
Port Priority [0..240]
The MSTP port priority in CIST. The priority is in the increments of 16.
The default value is 128.
Range: 1..240
Port Path Cost [0..200000000]
The MSTP port path cost in CIST. The default value will correspond to the recommendation specified in IEEE 802.1s Table 13-2 which varies depending upon link speed.
Range: 0..200000000
STATUS
Operation Status of Edge Port
The MSTP operational status of a specific port for the CIST.
1: Enable
2: Disable
Is Part of P2P Link
The MSTP operational point to point mac of a specific port for the CIST.
1: True
2: False
Port ID
The MSTP port identifier of a specific port in CIST.
Port Forwarding State
The MSTP forwarding state of a specific port in CIST.
1: Discarding
2: Learning
3: Forwarding
4: Disabled
5: Manual Fwd
6: Not Participate
Designated Bridge ID
The MSTP designated bridge ID of a specific port in CIST.
Designated Port ID
The MSTP designated port ID of a specific port in CIST.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 479
Designated Cost
The MSTP designated cost of a specific port in CIST.
Topology Changing
The MSTP topology change acknowledge for a specific port in the CIST.
1: True
2: False
Port Role
The STP port role.
MST tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> MST tab.
MST ID [1..4094]
The MSTP instance ID
Port Priority [0..240]
The MSTP port priority in CIST. The priority is in the increments of 16.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
480 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The default value is 128.
Range: 1..240
Port Path Cost [0..200000000]
The MSTP port path cost in CIST. The default value will correspond to the recommendation specified in IEEE 802.1s Table 13-2 which varies depending upon link speed.
Range: 0..200000000
Port ID
The MSTP port identifier of a specific port in a specific instance.
Value as Delivered.
Port Forwarding State
The MSTP forwarding state of a specific port in CIST.
1: Discarding
2: Learning
3: Forwarding
4: Disabled
5: Manual Fwd
6: Not Participate
Designated Bridge ID
The MSTP designated bridge ID of a specific port in a specific instance.
Designated Port ID
The MSTP designated port ID of a specific port in a specific instance.
Designated Cost
The MSTP designated cost of a specific port in a specific instance.
Port Role
The STP port role.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 481
Policing tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> Policing tab.
Policing
This item indicates the status of the port policing control that can be:
1: checked / enabled
2: unchecked /disabled
Broadcast Limit /Policing CIR
This specifies the bandwith limit of the indexed port, over which the broadcast packets are discarded.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
482 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Tunnelling tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> Tunnelling tab.
Network Interface Mode
The Switch's Port is configured either in UNI or NNI Mode.
1: User to Network Interface
2: Network to Network Interface
BPDU Tunneling
The switch's Port is configured for BPDU Tunneling.
1: Tunneling
2: No Tunneling
This Box is deactivated if the Port is Configured in UNI mode.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 483
VLAN Translation tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> VLAN Translation tab.
Egress VLAN ID
The item represents an egress vlan Id that replaces the incoming vlan Id on the incoming port. This table is significant if Vlan Change Mode is equal to "Per port change" . It store the out Vlan ID Tag that translate the ingress tags received on the port Id.
Incoming Vlan Id
It represents an istance of incoming Vlan Id.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
484 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Egress QoS tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> Egress QoS tab.
Number of Egress Traffic Classes
The number of egress traffic classes supported on this port.
A table of Queueing Mode parameters.
Queue ID
The queue id of the specific queue for which the parameters are to be get or set.
Queueing Mode
The queue mode to be set or get for the specified queue.
1: Disabled
2: Strict Priority Queueing
3: Weighted Fair Queueing
Queueing Weight Factor
Weight Factor is a 16 bit value which limits total bandwidth that a queue occupies in case of congestion.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 485
Deficit Count
The deficit count for the queue, a 21 bit value which is reduced by the packet length for every packet transmitted from the queue.
Traffic Shaping tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Management push-button... -> Traffic Shaping tab.
Port rate
This item indicates the committed traffic –shaping rate. This is the sustained rate permitted by the traffic-shaping.
Queue ID
The queue id of the specific queue for which the parameters are to be get or set.
Queue rate
This item indicates the committed traffic –shaping rate. This is the sustained rate permitted by the traffic-shaping
This value can be setup in 64kps steps up to the port cpacity (10, 100, Mbps or 1 Gbps).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
486 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.14 IF7FE2GEL2 - Port Statistics Information
ETH Packets tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Statistics... -> ETH Packets tab.
ETH PACKETS
A list of interface entries.
Unicast Packets Rx
The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
Unicast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Broadcast Packets Rx
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 487
Broadcast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Multicast Packets Rx
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.
Multicast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.
FCS Errors
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check.
Frames too long
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
STP tab
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
488 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> System -> Ports... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Port Statistics... -> STP tab.
STP BPDU Rx
The STP BPDUs received on a specific port.
STP BPDU Tx
The STP BPDUs sent from a specific port.
RSTP BPDU Rx
The RSTP BPDUs received on a specific port.
RSTP BPDU Tx
The RSTP BPDUs sent from a specific port.
MSTP BPDU Rx
The MSTP BPDUs received on a specific port.
MSTP BPDU Tx
The MSTP BPDUs sent from a specific port.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 489
37.15 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Configuration
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG...
Lag ID
This value corresponds with the Lag interface in the ifTable
Name
The associated name of the LAG used during creation
Link Trap
Configures sending traps when the LAG interface goes up or down
1 : checked
2 : unchecked
Administrative mode
Administratively enables or disables this LAG
Type
Lag Type
1: static
2: dynamic
LAG ID Ports
Port speed
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
490 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
LAG port speed
Port
Lag port index
Status
Lag port status
1: active
2: inactive
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 491
37.16 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Add
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> Add... push button.
Name
The associated name of the LAG used during creation
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
492 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.17 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Entry Modify
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push button.
Name
The associated name of the LAG used during creation
Link Trap
Configures sending traps when the LAG interface goes up or down
1 : checked
2 : unchecked
Administrative mode
Administratively enables or disables this LAG
Type
Lag Type
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 493
37.18 IF7FE2GEL2 - LAG Statistics Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> LAG... -> (select an entry in the table) -> LAG Statistics push button.
Unicast Packets Rx
The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
Unicast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Broadcast Packets Rx
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
Broadcast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Multicast Packets Rx
The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer, which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
494 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Multicast Packets Tx
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes both Group and Functional addresses.
FCS Errors
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets
in length but do not pass the FCS check.
Frames too long
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
Errors Occurred RX
The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them form being delivered
Ethernet statistics Index
The value of this item uniquely identifies this entry.
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources.
Octets
The total number of octets of data received on the network.
Packets
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received.
Broadcast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
CRC Align Errors
The total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Packets
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and were otherwise well formed.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 495
37.19 IF7FE2GEL2 - Group Config
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Groups...
Group
This specifies the Rx Water Mark Port Group number
Ports Rx Water Port Group string
Flow Control
Config flowcontrol allows you to configure the flow control for this port.
1: Asymmetrical Rx
2: Asymmetrical Tx
3: Symmetrical
4: Disabled
Note:
Fast Ethernet ports do not support asymmetrical modes.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
496 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Drop
This specifies the Rx Water Mark Drop value.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 497
37.20 IF7FE2GEL2 - Groups Queue Entry Config
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Groups... -> (select an entry in the table) -> Queue Config... push button.
Group
This specifies the Port Group number
Queue
This specifies TX Water Mark Queue number
Water Mark
This specifies Tx Water Mark Value for the Port Group queue.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
498 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.21 IF7FE2GEL2 - Trap info
Current tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Traps... -> Current tab.
FILTER
Severity
The alarm severity selection
Trap
Selection of Trap
Set Filter
Filter selection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 499
TRAP
The traps sent since last viewed.
Time
System uptime when trap was sent. Shows how long the system has been up when the trap occurred.
It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Severity
The severity associated
Trap Object Severity Threshold
broadcastStormStartTrap
Port Minor The broadcastStormStart trap is issued when the number of broadcast packets received in a second from a port is higher than the broadcast threshold (via sysConfigBroadcastThreshold).
broadcastStormEndTrap
Port Cleared (Not Alarmed)
The broadcastStormStop trap is issued when the number of broadcast packets received in a second from a port is lower than the broadcast threshold (i.e. signals that a BroadcastStormStart don’t exist anymore).
linkDown Port Major The linkDown trap is issued when the sending protocol entity recognizes a failure in one of the communication links represented in the agent's configuration.
linkUp Port Cleared (Not Alarmed)
The linkUp trap is issued when the sending protocol entity recognizes that one of the communication links represented in the agent's configuration has come up (i.e. signals that a linkDown don’t exist anymore).
RemoteFault Port Minor The RemotFault trap is issued when the attached remote device signals to the local end a fault condition.
NoRemoteFault Port Cleared (Not Alarmed)
The NoRemotFault trap is issued when the attached remote device signals to the local end a removed fault condition.
MismatchAutoNegotiation
Port Minor The MismatchAutoNegotiation trap is issued on local device, when the remote device does not support the required operation parameters.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
500 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
NoMismatchAutoNegotiation
Port Cleared (Not Alarmed)
The NoMismatchAutoNegotiation trap is issued on local device, when the remote device supports the required operation parameters (i.e. signals that a MismatchAutoNegotiation does not exist anymore).
NoCompleteAutoNegotiation
Port Major The NoCompleteAutoNegotiation trap is issued on local device, when the Auto Negotiation process was not completed within 10s.
CompleteAutoNegotiation
Port Cleared (Not Alarmed)
The CompleteAutoNegotiation trap is issued on local device, when the AutoNegotiation process was completed within 10s.
NoValidCDB Card Major The NoValidCDB trap is issued when the CDB (Configuration Data Base/MIB) file is not valid (corrupted, wrong format, etc.)
ValidCDB Card Cleared (Not Alarmed)
The ValidCDB trap is issued when the CDB (Configuration Data Base/MIB) file is valid.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 501
History tab
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Traps... -> History tab.
LOG
Time
System uptime when trap was sent. Shows how long the system has been up when the trap occurred.
It is displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.
Description
Description of the trap sent
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
502 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.22 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Config
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration.
This table contains information about every aggregate that is associated with the System
Aggregator ID
The aggregate ID associated with the System
MAC Address
A read only value carrying the individual MAC address assigned to the Aggregator
System Priority
A read-write value indicating the priority value associated with the Actor’s System ID
System ID
Read-write Mac Address value used as a unique identifier for the system that contains this aggregator
Aggregator config
A read only Boolean value indicating whether the aggregator represents an aggregate (TRUE) or an individual link (FALSE)
Administrator key
The current administrative value of the key for the aggregator
Operational Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregator
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 503
Partner System ID
A read only Mac address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current protocol Partner of this aggregator. A value of zero indicates that there is no known partner. If the aggregation is manually configured this system ID value will be a value assigned by the local system
Partner System Priority
A read only value that indicates the priority value associated with the Partner System ID. If the aggregation is manually configured this system priority value will be a value assigned by the local system
Partner Operational Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregator’s current protocol partner
Collector Max Delay
This value defines the maximum delay, in terms of microsecond, that may be imposed by the frame collector between receiving a frame from an aggregate Parser , and either delivering the frame to its MAC Client or discarding the frame
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
504 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.23 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Details
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration -> (select an entry in the table) -> Details push button.
Aggregator ID
The aggregate ID associated with the System
Port Name
Either the value '0', or the port number of the port on which a frame having a source address equal to the value of the corresponding instance of Address has been seen.
String with the port name or "0".
System ID Priority
A read-write value indicating the priority value associated with the Actor’s System ID
System ID
Read-write Mac Address value used as a unique identifier for the system that contains this aggregator
Administrator key
The current administrative value of the key for the aggregator
Port Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregation port. Range 0..65535
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 505
Administrative Partner priority
A read-write value used to define the administrative value of priority associated with the partner’s System ID
Operational Partner Priority
A read only value indicating the operational value of priority associated with the Partner’s System ID
Administrative Partner System ID
A read-write MAC Address value representing the administrative value of the Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner System ID
Partner System ID
A read only Mac address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current protocol Partner of this aggregator. A value of zero indicates that there is no known partner. If the aggregation is manually configured this system ID value will be a value assigned by the local system
Administrative Partner Key
The current administrative value of the key for the protocol Partner
Operational partner key
The current operational value of the key for the protocol Partner
Selected Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has currently selected. Zero indicates that the Aggregation Port has not selected an aggregator, either because it is in the process of detaching from an aggregate or because there is no suitable aggregator available for it to select
Attached Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the aggregator that this aggregator port is currently attached to. Zero indicates that the aggregation Port is not currently attached to an aggregator
Port number
The port number locally assigned to the aggregation Port
Port priority
The priority value assigned to this aggregation port.
Administrative Port Number
The current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner
Operational Port number
The operational port number assigned to this aggregation Port by the aggregation Port’s protocol partner
Port priority
Value of the port priority for the protocol partner
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
506 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Operational Port priority
The priority value assigned to this aggregation Port by the partner
Port Administrative state
A string corresponding to the administrative value of the Port state
Port operational State
A string corresponding to the operational value of the Port state
Port partner administrative State
A string corresponding to the administrative value of the state of the protocol partner
Port Partner Operational State
A string corresponding to the operational value of the state of the protocol partner
Port Aggregator config
A read only Boolean value indicating whether the aggregator represents an aggregate (TRUE) or an individual link (FALSE)
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 507
37.24 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Modify
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Configuration -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push button.
Aggregator ID
The aggregate ID associated with the System
Port Name
Either the value '0', or the port number of the port on which a frame having a source address equal to the value of the corresponding instance of Address has been seen.
String with the port name or "0".
System ID Priority
A read-write value indicating the priority value associated with the Actor’s System ID
System ID
Read-write Mac Address value used as a unique identifier for the system that contains this aggregator
Administrator key
The current administrative value of the key for the aggregator
Port Key
The current operational value of the key for the aggregation port. Range 0..65535
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
508 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Administrative Partner priority
A read-write value used to define the administrative value of priority associated with the partner’s System ID
Operational Partner Priority
A read only value indicating the operational value of priority associated with the Partner’s System ID
Administrative Partner System ID
A read-write MAC Address value representing the administrative value of the Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner System ID
Partner System ID
A read only Mac address value consisting of the unique identifier for the current protocol Partner of this aggregator. A value of zero indicates that there is no known partner. If the aggregation is manually configured this system ID value will be a value assigned by the local system
Administrative Partner Key
The current administrative value of the key for the protocol Partner
Operational partner key
The current operational value of the key for the protocol Partner
Selected Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has currently selected. Zero indicates that the Aggregation Port has not selected an aggregator, either because it is in the process of detaching from an aggregate or because there is no suitable aggregator available for it to select
Attached Aggregator ID
The identifier value of the aggregator that this aggregator port is currently attached to. Zero indicates that the aggregation Port is not currently attached to an aggregator
Port number
The port number locally assigned to the aggregation Port
Port priority
The priority value assigned to this aggregation port
Administrative Port Number
The current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner
Operational Port number
The operational port number assigned to this aggregation Port by the aggregation Port’s protocol partner
Port priority
Value of the port priority for the protocol partner
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 509
Operational Port priority
The priority value assigned to this aggregation Port by the partner
Port Administrative state
A string corresponding to the administrative value of the Port state
Port operational State
A string corresponding to the operational value of the Port state
Port partner administrative State
A string corresponding to the administrative value of the state of the protocol partner
Port Partner Operational State
A string corresponding to the operational value of the state of the protocol partner
Port Aggregator config
A read only Boolean value indicating whether the aggregator represents an aggregate (TRUE) or an individual link (FALSE)
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
510 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.25 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Statistics Info
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Statistics...
Interface
Port name
LACPDU Rx
The number of valid LACPDUs received on this aggregation port
Marker PDU Rx
The number of valid Marker PDUs received on this aggregation port
Marker Response PDU
The number of valid Marker Response PDUs received on this aggregation port
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 511
Unknown Rx
The number of frames received that either carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type value but contain an unknown PDU or are addressed to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address but do not carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type
Illegal Rx
The number of frames received that carry the Slow Protocol Ethernet Type value but contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol subtype
LACPDU Tx
The number of valid LACPDUs transmitted on this aggregation port
Marker PDU Tx
The number of Marker PDUs transmitted on this aggregation port
Marker Response PDU
The number of Marker Response PDUs transmitted on this aggregation port
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
512 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.26 IF7FE2GEL2 - Aggregator Entry Debug
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> Aggregator -> Debug...
Filter
Interface
Port name
Port Name
An unique value for each interface
Rx State
The receive state machine for the Aggregation Port
1. Current
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 513
2. Expired
3. Defaulted
4. Initialize
5. LACP Disabled
6. Port Disabled
Last Rx Time
The value of time when the last LACPDU was received by this Aggregation Port
It is displayed in days, hours, minutes and second
Mux State
The value of the MUX state machine for the Aggregation Port
1. Detached
2. Waiting
3. Attached
4. Collecting
5. Distributing
6. Collecting-distributing
Mux reason
A human-readable text string indicating the reason for the most recent change of MUX state machine
Churn State
The state of the Actor Churn Detection machine for the Aggregation Port. A value of "noCHURN" indicates that the state machine is either the NO_ACTOR_CHURN or the ACTOR_CHURN_MONITOR state, and "churn" indicates that the state machine is in the ACTOR_CHURN state
Partner Churn State
The state of the Partner Churn Detection machine for the Aggregation Port. A value of "noCHURN" indicates that the state machine is either the NO_PARTNER_CHURN or the PARTNER_CHURN_MONITOR state, and "churn" indicates that the state machine is in the PARTNER_CHURN state
Churn Count
Count of the number of times the Actors Churn state machine has entered the ACTOR_CHURN state
Partner Churn Count
Count of the number of times the Partner Churn state machine has entered the PARTNER_CHURN state
Sync Transition Count
Count of the number of times the Actor’s Mux state machine has entered the IN_SYNC state
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
514 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Partner Sync Transition Count
Count of the number of times the Partner’s Mux state machine has entered the IN_SYNC state
Change Count
Count of the number of times the Actor’s perception of the LAG ID for this Aggregation Port has changed
Partner Change Count
Count of the number of times the Partner’s perception of the LAG ID for this Aggregation Port has changed
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 515
37.27 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Config
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> Configuration...
VLAN ID
The VLAN-ID or other identifier refering to this VLAN.
VLAN Type
The VLAN-type referring to this VLAN.
1. Other
2. Permanent
3. Dynamic GVRP
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
516 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.28 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Permanent Entry Add
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> Add push-button...
VLAN ID [1..4096]
The VLAN-ID or other identifier refering to this VLAN.
Port Name
A unique value for each interface.
Participation
Chooses the participation for this VLAN
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 517
1. Auto
2. Included
3. Excluded
Tagging
Chooses the Tag for this VLAN
1. Tagged
2. Untagged
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
518 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.29 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Modify
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> (select an entry in the table) -> Modify push-button.
VLAN ID [1..4096]
The VLAN-ID or other identifier refering to this VLAN.
Port Name
A unique value for each interface.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 519
Participation
1. Auto
2. Included
3. Excluded
Tagging
1. Tagged
2. Untagged
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
520 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.30 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Entry Details
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> (select an entry in the table) -> Details push-button.
VLAN ID
The VLAN-ID or other identifier referring to this VLAN.
Port Name
A unique value for each interface.
Participation
Chooses the participation for this VLAN
1. Auto
2. Included
3. Excluded
Tagging
Chooses the Tag for this VLAN
1. Tagged
2. Untagged
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 521
37.31 IF7FE2GEL2 - VLAN Statistics Info
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> VLAN -> VLAN Statistics...
A table containing per-port, per-VLAN statistics for traffic received.
VLAN ID
The VLAN-ID or other identifier refering to this VLAN.
Frames Tx
The number of valid frames transmitted by this port to its segment from the local forwarding process for this VLAN.
Discarted Frames Rx
The number of valid frames received by this port from its segment which were classified as belonging to this VLAN which were discarded due to VLAN related reasons.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
522 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.32 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Info
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> Ethernet Statistics...
FILTER
Interface
Shows all Local Ports, Logical Ports and LAGs Available.
A list of Ethernet statistics entries.
Ethernet statistics Index
The value of this object uniquely identifies this etherStats entry.
Interface
This object identifies the source of the data that this etherStats entry is configured to analyze. String with the ethernet interface on this device.
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 523
Octets
The total number of octets of data received on the network.
Packets
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received.
Broadcast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
CRC Align Errors
The total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Packets
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and were otherwise well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
524 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.33 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an item in the table) -> Details push-button..
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources.
Octets
The total number of octets of data received on the network.
Packets
The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received.
Broadcast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Packets
The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 525
CRC Align Errors
The total number of packets received that had a length of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets long and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and were otherwise well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
526 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.34 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Config
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> History Control...
History Control Index
An index that uniquely identifies an entry in the historyControl table.
Interface
This object identifies the source of the data for which historical data was collected and placed in a media-specific table on behalf of this historyControlEntry.
This source can be any ethernet interface on this device.
Buckets Requested [1..65535]
The requested number of discrete time intervals over which data is to be saved in the part of the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Buckets Granted
The number of discrete sampling intervals over which data shall be saved in the part of the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Interval [1..3600 s]
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled for each bucket in the part of the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Range: 1..3600
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 527
Status
The status of this historyControl entry.
1: Valid
2: Under Creation
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
528 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.35 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Control Entry Add
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an entry in the table) -> Add push-button..
History Control Index
An index that uniquely identifies an entry in the historyControl table.
Interface
This object identifies the source of the data for which historical data was collected and placed in a media-specific table on behalf of this historyControlEntry.
Shows all ethernet interfaces on this device.
Buckets Requested [1..65535]
The requested number of discrete time intervals over which data is to be saved in the part of the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Interval [1..3600 s]
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled for each bucket in the part of the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Range: 1..3600
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 529
37.36 IF7FE2GEL2 - History Ethernet Statistics Info
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> History Ethernet Statistics...
FILTER
Interface
Shows all ethernet interfaces on this device.
History Control Index
Shows all History Control Indexes Available.
This Index uniquely identifies an entry in the historyControl table.
Interval (s) [1..3600 s]
Shows Time Intervals for Filtration.
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled for each bucket in the part of the media-specific table associated with this historyControlEntry.
Range [1..3600 (1 hour)]
History Control Index
The history identified by a particular value of this index is the same history as identified by the same value of historyControlIndex.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
530 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Interface
This object identifies the source of the data for which historical data was collected and placed in a media-specific table on behalf of this historyControlEntry.
Shows all ethernet interfaces on this device.
Sample Index
An index that uniquely identifies the particular sample this entry represents among all samples associated with the same historyControlEntry.
Time of Started Interval
The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured.
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources during this sampling interval.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Packets
The number of packets (including bad packets) received during this sampling interval.
Broadcast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to the broadcast address.
Multicast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to a multicast address.
CRC Align Errors
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that had a length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) had either a bad Frame
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 531
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment during this sampling interval.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
532 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
37.37 IF7FE2GEL2 - Ethernet Statistics Details
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the card: Configuration -> ETH Switch -> RMON -> (select an entry in the table) -> Details push-button...
History Control Index
The history identified by a particular value of this index is the same history as identified by the same value of historyControlIndex.
Time of Started Interval
The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured.
Dropped Events
The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources during this sampling interval.
Octets
The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 533
Packets
The number of packets (including bad packets) received during this sampling interval.
Broadcast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to the broadcast address.
Multicast Packets
The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to a multicast address.
CRC Align Errors
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that had a length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Undersize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.
Oversize Packets
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) but were otherwise well formed.
Fragments
The total number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets) had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Jabbers
The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
Collisions
The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment during this sampling interval.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 535
38 RPR
38.1 RPR Switch Configuration
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration...
L2 Switch tab:
Supervision
Set the checkbox to enable supervision.
RPR Node ID [0..63]
Enter the RPR node ID.
Protection Wait to Restore Time [1s..300s]
Enter the Wait to Restore Time.
Protection Hold Off Time [0..2000 x 10ms]
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
536 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Enter the Protection Hold Off Time.
Permanent MACs tab:
Filter
Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.
In the table, you can add a new, or delete an existing list entry.
Learned MACs tab:
Life Time Value [Disabled, 2..1440 min]
Enter the life time value or disable the life time restriction.
Filter
Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.
Select CUG ID [0..4095]
Select the CUG ID, or request the learned MAC entries.
The table shows the permanent MACs. You can copy to permanent MAC or delete an existing list entry.
Topology tab:
Filter
Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.
Ring Not Closed
Informs you about the ring configuration.
The table shows the learned MACs.
Card Release tab:
Card Release Switch
Values: Cleared, Forced Switch, Lockout.
Card Release State
Shows the current card state.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 537
How to Configure RPR Protection
Copy to Permanent MACs
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
538 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
38.2 RPR Ring Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an PF2G5 symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR 3 o’clock or 9 o’clock -> Performance -> RPR Ring...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals
If the checkbox is cleared:
The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 539
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately
Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection.
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval.
Time Time of the current interval.
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).
Stream Frames Rx Number of received stream frames.
Best Effort Frames Rx Number of received best effort frames.
Dropped Frames Rx Number of dropped frames in the received signal.
Throughput Stream Frames Rx [byte]
Throughput of received stream frames.
Throughput Best Effort Frames Rx [byte]
Throughput of received best effort frames.
Average Throughput Stream Rx [bytes/s]
Average number of received bytes per second..
Average Throughput Best Effort Rx [bytes/s]
Average number of received bytes per second..
Layer Threshold
VC4 30% (2400 BBE/s)
STM-4 RS-Layer 50% (4000 BBE/s)
STM-4 MS-Layer 30% (9600 BBE/s or 2400 BBE/s for each channel)
Previous 15 min tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
540 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 541
38.3 RPR Feeder Performance
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an PF2G5 symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> LP #n -> Performance -> RPR Feeder...
This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.
Current tab:
Enable Performance Monitoring
This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.
If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):
The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
542 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
If the checkbox is cleared:
The current 15 min values are deleted
The remaining data is retained
The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately
Note: The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.
Current
The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current 15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to UAS detection.
Display Meaning
Date Date of the current interval.
Time Time of the current interval.
TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).
Broadcast Frames Rx Number of received broadcast frames.
Broadcast Frames Tx Number of transmitted broadcast frames.
Multicast Frames Rx Number of received multicast frames.
Multicast Frames Tx Number of transmitted multicast frames.
Unicast Frames Rx Number of received unicast frames.
Unicast Frames Tx Number of transmitted unicast frames.
Lost Frames Ingress Stream Queue Overflow Rx
Number of receiving overflow conditions.
Lost Frames Egress Stream Queue Overflow Tx
Number of transmitting overflow conditions.
Lost Frames Ingress Best Effort Queue Overflow Rx
Number of receiving overflow conditions.
Dropped Frames Rx Number of dropped frames in the received signal.
Total Throughput Rx [bytes] Total number of received bytes.
Total Throughput Tx [bytes] Total number of transmitted bytes.
Average Throughput Rx [bytes/s]
Average number of received bytes per second..
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 543
Average Throughput Tx [byte/s] Average number of transmitted bytes per second.
Previous 15 min tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Previous 24 h tab:
Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h
Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.
The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the transport function.
Note:
The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
544 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
38.4 Adding a Permanent Entry
This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a PF2G5 symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration... tab: Permanent MACs -> Add...
CUG ID [0..4095]
Allows to select the CUG ID.
Port ID [1..4]
Allows to select the Port ID.
Node ID [0..63]
Allows to select the Node ID.
MAC Address
Allows to enter the unique MAC address.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 545
39 Security
39.1 Access Information
This window is accessible via its toolbar button
The window shows the actual access right.
You:
The NSAP of the element manager, which currently owns the "write access".
Nobody:
If the element manager which currently owns the "write access" is connected via F interface, "F-interface" is shown.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
546 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
39.2 NMS NE Password
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Security -> Change Password...
The NE stores 3 individual passwords for the operating systems:
OS, LCT and NCT.
Each system can change its assigned password, i.e. OS can change only the OS password in the NE, LCT can only change LCT password and NCT can only change the NCT password in the NE. In addition, every operating system can reset the other passwords inside the NE to the default password.
For all OS, LCT and NCT the default password is: NEPASSWORD
As usual, when changing the current password, the operator must enter the current password and type the new password twice.
Password build rule:
The password must have 8 ASCII printable characters at minimum and 15 at maximum.
Independently if it is successful or not, each attempt to connect and to change a password will be written into the Activity Log. This Activity Log can be requested by the operator.
Note:
When changing the OS (NMS) password via the LCT, the operator has to update the new password manually in the DCN properties of the Network Element Controller (NEC).
If this is not done, any new initialization of NEC will fail.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 547
39.3 Change Password to Default
This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Security -> Change Password... -> Default...
Before setting a password to default, the current NMS NE password must be entered.
The available setting options depend on the NE control mode (LCT, NCT or OS).
For all OS, LCT and NCT the default password is: NEPASSWORD
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 549
40 Software
40.1 Software Management
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Software Management...
This window displays information about the active APS and the inactive APS and offers software download functions.
Active APS:
Order Number
Identifies a delivered NE software version.
SW/FW Code
Identifies a delivered NE software version.
APS Record...
Opens the Active APS Record window.
Active APS Compatibility...
Opens the APS Compatibility Information window.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
550 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Inactive APS:
Load State
Load State Description
Not loaded No valid inactive APS is stored persistently in the NE, and the software storage medium is not prepared for software download
Being loaded Software download in progress
Loaded A complete inactive APS is stored persistently in the NE
Being initialized The software storage medium is being prepared for software download
Initialized The software storage medium is prepared for software download
Order Number
Displays the order number of the inactive APS.
SW/FW Code
Displays the SW/FW code of the inactive APS.
Download... / Delta Download...
Opens a MS Windows standard File Open dialog for APS file selection.
Clicking Open opens the Software Download window.
If the download was successful and the load state is initialized, click Swap APS to set the inactive APS to active
Swap APS
With the Swap APS button, a shutdown is automatically executed and a NE startup is induced, using the previous inactive APS. If errors occur during a very early phase of the startup, the NE startup is interrupted and a second reset is performed to revert the previous APS.
After a successful swap, the previous APS becomes the inactive APS and vice versa.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 551
40.2 Software Download
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Software Management... -> Download... -> (in the opened window, select the relevant file) -> Open.
This window displays APS information and allows to control and monitor the software download process.
By pressing the Start button, the download process begins.
By pressing the Stop button, the download process can be terminated.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
552 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
40.3 Delta Software Download
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Software Management... -> Delta Download... -> (in the opened window, select the relevant file) -> Open.
This window displays APS information and allows to control and monitor the delta software download process.
By pressing the Start button, the download process begins.
By pressing the Stop button, the download process can be terminated.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 553
40.4 Active APS Record
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Software Management... -> APS Record...
This window displays details of the active APS record.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
554 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
40.5 APS Compatibility Information
This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -> Software Management... -> Active APS Compatibility...
This window displays the contents of the HW/SW compatibility of the active APS (Application Program System) object in a tree structure.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 555
41 Fault Clearance
41.1 NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to the NE, Subrack and Microshelf can occur:
Alarm name: "2nd Power Supply"
Second Power Supply failed.
1. Check the Power Supply connections and configuration.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "Internal LAN Failed"
Internal LAN failed.
1. Check LAN connections and configuration.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "Loss of Communication Between NE and Management System"
Q-interface link interrupted.
1. Check connection with Q connector
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
556 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
2. If the alarm persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm Name "Telemetry Interface n"
see TIF Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 557
41.2 Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
This help page applies to the following SURPASS hiT 7070 cards:
• IFO155M
• IFQ622M
• IFS2G5
• IFS2G5B
• IFQ2G5
• IFQ2G5B
• IFS10G
• IFS10GB
• IFS10G-M
• IFS10G-R
• IFS10G-WLS
• IFQGBE
• IFQBEB
• IFOFE
• IFS40G-MX
• IFSOA
• IFSOA-PDC
• IFSOB
• IFSOB-PDC
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to an optical interface card can occur:
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
558 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Alarm name: "Major"
HW or SW alarm of the card.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start. >>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "T0"
1. To clock failure.
2. Check the timing input.
3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "T0X"
1. T0X clock set failure.
2. Check the timing input.
3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "T0Y"
1. T0Y clock set failure.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 559
2. Check the timing input.
3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "ISTM Xn" or "ISTM Yn" or ISTM #n
Backplane signal failed.
1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start. >>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "Card Unavailable"
Card unavailable.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start. >>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "Port Absent"
The port module is missing.
1. Insert a port module of correct type.
2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "Port Mismatch"
The used port module type does not match the card interface.
1. Replace the port module by the correct type.
2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance
NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
560 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 561
41.3 Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
This help page applies to the following SURPASS hiT 7070 cards:
• IF2M
• IF345M
• IFO155M-E
• IFQGBE-E
• IFQGBEB-E
• IFOFE-E
• IFOFES-E
• IFOFGE-E
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to an electrical interface card can occur:
Alarm name: "Major"
HW or SW alarm of the card.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start. >>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
562 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "T0"
Internal NE system clock failed.
1. Be sure to use the correct timing configuration.
2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
5. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "ISTM Xn" or "ISTM Yn" or ISTM #n
Backplane signal failed.
1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start. >>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service..
Alarm name: "Card Unavailable"
Card failed.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start. >>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "LSU n Missing" (only with IF2M cards)
Line Switching Unit missing.
1. Check the dedicated LSU.
2. Extract the IF2M card and insert it again to perform a cold start. >>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
3. If the alarm persists, replace the LSU / IF2M card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "Protection Shelf Failed" (only with IFO155M-E)
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 563
Protection Shelf failed.
1. Check the connections and the configuration.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "2nd Power Supply" (only with IFO155M-E)
Second Power Supply failed.
1. Check the Power Supply connections and configuration.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "Internal LAN Failed" (only with IFO155M-E)
Internal LAN failed.
1. Check LAN connections and configuration.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "PLC" (only with IFOFES-E)
Partial Loss of Capacity.
1. Check the configuration, what´s the minimum capacity (Mbit/s) of an LCAS group. If there is a VC12-5v (5x 2.1 Mbit = 10.5 Mbit) and the threshold is set at 7, then the alarm rises, when 2 VC12 have failed. This alarm occurs for Rx (PLCR), if received VCs are failed, and Tx (PLCT), if the sent VCs are not present at the partner side. Even a wrong (too high adjusted) PLC threshold has to be considered.
2. Check whether TTI informations for VCs are present.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "TLC" (only with IFOFES-E)
Total Loss of Capacity
1. Check if all VCs of an LCAS group are failed. This alarm occurs also for Rx (TLCR) and Tx (TLCT).
2. Check whether TTI informations for VCs are present.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
564 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Alarm name: "FELNE" (only with IFOFES-E)
FarEndLCAS not enabled. One side is configured with LCAS, and the other not (only VC groups).
1. Check if both sides are configured in the same way, especially that in both sides LCAS is configured.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "FOPR" (only with IFOFES-E)
Failure of Protocol. The LCAS protocol has CRC errors.
1. Check if there is a degraded SDH link.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "MND" (only with IFOFES-E)
Member Not Detectable. Several VCs of the LCAS group are not detectable or the delay between each other is too great.
1. Check if all members of the LCAS-group have not more than 45 ms differential delay.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name:"SQM" (only with IFOFES-E)
Sequence mismatch. The number of the VCs inside of the LCAS group is inconsistent.
1. Check if both sides are configured in the same way.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 565
SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance
NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
566 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
41.4 Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
This help page applies to the following SURPASS hiT 7070 cards:
• PF2G5
• SF2G5
• SF10G
• SF160G
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to a switch fabric card can occur:
Alarm name: "Major"
HW or SW alarm of the card.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start. >>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 567
Alarm name: "T0"
1. To clock failure.
2. Check the timing input.
3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "T0X"
1. T0X clock set failure.
2. Check the timing input.
3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "T0Y"
1. T0Y clock set failure.
2. Check the timing input.
3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.n
Alarm name: "Failuer of ISTM Xn" or "Failure of ISTM Yn"
Backplane signal failed.
1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start. >>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "Failure of Internal Traffic Signal n"
Failure of Internal Traffic Signal.
1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start. >>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "Card Unavailable"
Card unavailable.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
568 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start. >>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 569
41.5 SCOH and CLU Card Fault Clearance
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to the SCOH and CLU cards can occur:
Alarm name: "EOW Unavailable"
EOW failed.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "Fan Failure"
Both fan units missing or at least two fans failed.
1. Replace the fan unit immediately.
2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
570 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Alarm names: "Fan Unit 1 Failure", "Fan Unit 2 Failure"
One fan failed or at low speed.
1. Replace the fan unit soon.
2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "Flash SW"
Flash SW failed.
For more information, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH
1. In case of a single Flash SW alarm, configure "Set to Idle" and "Set to Active".
2. If the alarm still persists, replace the defective MMC.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "Major"
HW or SW alarm of the SCOH card.
1. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "T0"
T0 clock failure.
1. Check the timing input.
2. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "T0X"
T0X clock set failure.
1. Check the timing input.
2. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "T0Y"
T0Y clock set failure.
1. Check the timing input.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 571
2. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.
3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "ULED Fail"
LED supply voltage (generated by SCOH for all cards) failed.
1. Replace the SCOH card.
2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Alarm name: "Card Unavailable"
SCOH card unavailable.
1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.
2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.
4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
NE and Subrack Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
572 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
41.6 TIF Fault Clearance
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator Guidelines) manual.
The following equipment alarms related to the TIF interface can occur:
As a basic principle, TIF alarms relate to faults that are not in the home NE.
SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance
NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
Fan Unit Fault Clearance
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 573
41.7 Fan Unit Fault Clearance
Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator Guidelines) manual.
The red fault LED indicates at least one fan is at low speed or failed.
Alarm name: "Fan Failure"
At least one fan is at low speed or failed.
1. Replace the fan unit according to the alarm types: "Fan Failure" and "Fan Unit 1/2 Failure", see SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance
2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance
TIF Fault Clearance
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 575
42 How to... (General Tasks)
42.1 How to Configure NSAP Settings
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. n the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Stack Parameters -> Configuration
3. In the Stack Parameters Config window, Layer 3 (NSAP) field, you can change the address settings, see MCF Stack Parameters Configuration.
Note:
The NSAP settings have critical influence on the entire network configuration and must not be changed without prior agreement of the network administrator.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
576 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
42.2 How to Configure the Subrack Equipping
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the slot number symbol where you want to change the NE equipment. A submenu appears, displaying all possible card types of this slot.
3. Click the required card type and configure the ports, if applicable. The card symbol of the selected card type is added to the Module View.
4. For further configurations, right-click the card symbol, and on the submenu, click Configuration.
How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports
SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 577
42.3 How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards
Configuring a traffic card:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click a slot number symbol.
3. Select a card from the context menu.
4. Select the Provisioning Modes, separately for each port if applicable.
5. Click Apply. The card will be added to the required equipping.
6. You can change the Provisioning Modes later on via the context menu of the card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
7. For further configurations, use the context menus of the card symbol and of the associated symbol(s) in the port list (appearing when the card symbol is clicked).
Removing a traffic card from the required equipping:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the slot number symbol.
3. Select Empty or Empty-Auto (or another card type) from the context menu.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
578 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
42.4 How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports
1. In the Module View, right-click a PDH or SDH interface card symbol -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
2. A Port Provisioning Config window opens. (An equivalent Card Equipment Config window opens automatically when a slot is newly equipped with a SDH interface card.)
3. Select Empty for every unused port.
4. Select Working or one of the offered protection schemes for every used port.
5. In protection case, the involved partner slots are displayed. Be sure that they are equipped with the same card type and configured properly.
6. Click Apply.
How to Configure the Subrack Equipping
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 579
42.5 How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click the symbol an interface card or packet switch fabric card.
3. In the port list, select a port symbol -> right-click Subview -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data... (or repeatedly Subview -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data..., if applicable)
4. In the Copy Data window, Copy Items area, set the checkbox(es) of the configuration(s) you want to copy, or click All Items to copy all configurations shown in the list.
5. In the Copy Units area, the Source field displays the source slot number and card name.
6. In the Targets field, the slot numbers of the possible targets are displayed.
7. Select the target(s) to where you want to copy the configuration settings. To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to select all entries in the list.
8. Click Apply. The selected configuration of the source card is copied to the card/cards selected in the Targets field.
Note:
Copy Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).
How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
580 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
42.6 How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object
1. In the Module View, right-click a suitable card symbol -> Copy Card Data...
2. In the Copy Card Data window , the Source field displays the source slot number and card name.
3. In the Targets field, the slot numbers for the possible targets are displayed.
4. Select the target to where you want to copy the configuration settings or click All Targets to select all entries in the list.
5. Click Apply. The selected configuration of the source card is copied to the card/cards selected in the Targets field.
Note:
Copy Card Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).
How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 581
42.7 How to Configure ETH Cards and Debugging
Configuring ETH cards:
1. Set the dedicated MUX structure (only IFOFES-E): Select the card -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview -> VC4 -> Configuration -> Mux Preparation.
2. Set the concatenation (only IFOFES-E): Select the card -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
3. Select a template (not with IFOFES-E): You should think before, which VC´s (capacity) are being used and then set a template, cause a belated modification is only possible with traffic interruption of all ports. Select the card -> Configuration -> Concatenation... Note: Adjacent VC4-4v can be changed over, via "Modify Template", to VC4-2v.. VC4-6v. The total sum must be always 8 VC4.
4. Setting of Bandwidth and Subchanneling: Select the card -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
5. Switching the VC´s: E.g. for a VC12-5v, 3 VC12 are switched via one SDH card/port and the other 2 VC12 via another SDH card/port. Therefore, not a VC12-5v must be selected, but the particular VC12´s in the cross connection window.
6. Concerning LCAS: For all involved VC´s, LCAS must be activated.
ETH traffic is not running:
1. Is the ETH link o.k.? Check the ETH Configuration window.
2. Check the "Signal Label" and the "TTI" with the VC4 Configuration window. When virtual concatenation is configured, check all single VCs (if o.k. the SDH connection is sure).
3. Both partners must have the same subchanneling entries (on or off). See GFP Assignment window.
4. If subchanneling is configured, check that channel ID is identical with both partners.
5. Are VCAT groups at both partners configured the same way (both with LCAS activated or not; no mixed way)?
6. With the Ethernet Packet Performance window, you can see, wether port traffic is coming/going (Rx/Tx). If all is dropped at Tx, then probably the subchanneling or the subchannel ID is wrong configured (Sink and Source port is not the same).
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 583
43 How to... (Timing)
43.1 How to Configure the Timing
1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> SEC...
T0:
2. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window , right-click the T0 symbol -> Configuration...
3. Select the Requested Timing Source for T0: T1 (STM signals), T3 (external clock input), Auto Selection (depending of the quality of the available clock pulses) or Free Running (in case no clock input is available).
- Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received quality levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections. - Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not override the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.
4. Click Apply. Click Close.
T1:
5. If a T1 timing source is used, right-click the T1 symbol -> Configuration... In the T1 Config window, Timing References tab, select the card(s) and port(s) used as timing references.
6. Click Apply. Click Close.
T3:
7. If a T3 timing source is used, right-click the T3 symbol -> Configuration... In the T3/T4 Config window, select the T3 mode and SSM settings (quality information about the used clock pulse, transmitted in the MSOH of the STM-n signal)
8. Click Apply. Click Close.
9. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, SA-Bit selection field next to the T3 symbol, select the SA bit(s) to be used with T3.
10. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, T0 Prio column, right-click the yellow field next to each used T1 or T3 timing source and define a priority relating to the T0 system clock selection.
11. You can lock out each T1 and T3 timing source (so that it is generally not available as a synchronization reference) by clicking the green hook next to the T0 Prio field. A red cross will appear indicating the lockout state of this timing source. To reset the lockout state, click the red cross.
T4:
12. Right-click the T4 symbol -> Configuration...
13. In the T3/T4 Config window, select the Requested Timing Source for T4, the T4 Mode, and the Minimum Quality Threshold for T4.
14. Click Apply. Click Close.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
584 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
15. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, T4 Prio column, right-click the yellow field next to each used T1 timing source, and define a priority relating to the T4 clock output selection.
16. In the SA-Bit selection field next to the T4 symbol, select the SA bit to be used with T4.
17. In the left-hand bottom part of the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, you can enable the Use of SSM for Selection and you can select the Wait to Restore (WTR) Time.
18. Click Apply. Click Close.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 585
43.2 How to Set Sync Priorities
1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> SEC...)
2. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, right-click the T0 Prio or T4 Prio field of the concerned T1 or T3 clock, select the priority (1 = highest) or "do not use". If the selected priority number is not unique within T0 Prio or T4 Prio, the system will change the other priorities automatically.
3. Click Apply.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 587
44 How to... (Alarms)
44.1 How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Option Settings button.
2. In the Option Settings window, select the Alarm Severity Threshold to be displayed. No alarms with lower priority will be displayed.
3. If the Alarm Flash checkbox in the General field is disabled, an alarm is indicated by highlighting the concerned symbol(s) permanently red, instead of flashing red.
4. Click OK.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
588 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
44.2 How to Suppress Alarms
Suppressing Equipment or SEC Alarms
1. In the Module View, right-click the relevant symbol -> Fault -> Equipment Alarms... or SEC Alarms... (In case of an already raised alarm, the concerned symbols are highlighted red or flashing red.).
2. In the Alarm window, set the Suppression checkbox of the alarm(s). Raised alarms are displayed at the top of the list.
3. Click Apply.
Suppressing Communication Alarms
1. In the Module View, click the relevant card symbol. (In case of an already raised alarm, the concerned symbols are highlighted red or flashing red.).
2. In the traffic view, right-click the card symbol -> Subview... -> STM-n or En-> Fault -> Communication Alarms...
3. In the Alarm window, set the Suppression checkbox of the alarm(s).
4. Click Apply.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 589
44.3 How to Configure TIF Ports
1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Configuration -> TIF...
2. In the NE - TIF #n Config window, enter an individual name and select the Closed or Open input polarity for each used TIF port.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 591
45 How to... (Cross Connections)
45.1 How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Filter Options
Setting cross connection filter options:
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, Filter area, use the selection fields to select the filtering features.
3. Click Set Filter to activate your filter settings. The table shows the available cross connections depending on your filter settings.
Clearing all cross connection filter settings:
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Reset Filter. The selection field settings change to All.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
592 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
45.2 How to Create a Cross Connection
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the CC Type, VC Level and Concatenation Counter N value (if applicable).
TP A:
4. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection start point.
5. Click the button "To TPA >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
TP B:
6. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection end point.
7. Click the button "To TPB >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
8. If no TP B’ termination point is required, proceed with step #12.
TP B’:
9. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as TP B’ cross connection end point. (The TP B’ selections depend on the selected CC Type.)
10. Click the button "To TPB' >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B' entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
11. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
12. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected. In the TP Selection list, the involved TPs are marked by asterisks.
13. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 593
45.3 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.
.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC12 VC Level.
4. The SDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection start point.
6. Click the button "To TPA >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection end point.
8. Click the button "To TPB >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
9. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 7 and 8 with TPB'.
10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
594 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
45.4 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.
.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC3 VC Level.
4. The SDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection start point.
6. Click the button "To TPA >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection end point.
8. Click the button "To TPB >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
9. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 7 and 8 with TPB'.
10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 595
45.5 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.
.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC4 VC Level.
4. The SDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection start point.
6. Click the button "To TPA >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection end point.
8. Click the button "To TPB >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
9. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 7 and 8 with TPB'.
10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
1. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
596 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
45.6 How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12/VC3 Cross Connection
1. Before a VC12 cross connection on the ETH card could be done, the multiplex structure on the ETH card must be changed to VC12.
2. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.
.
3. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the connection type.
5. Select the VC12/VC3 connection layer.
6. Select an SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection field.
7. Select an Ethernet card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection field.
8. The SDH and Ethernet card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (->Close).
9. Select the applicable TP indexes. Attention: On the TP, which relates to the ETH card, the LCT offers always all possible TP indexes of the VC level (i.e. 3x VC3 and 63x VC12).
10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
12. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List (depending on the filter settings).
13. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 597
45.7 How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.
.
2. You can identify the TP allocation (tributary or ring side) via the GFP Assignment window (-> Close).
3. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC Level.
5. In the TP Selection area, select an Ethernet Card and the VC number you want as cross connection start point.
6. Click the button "To TPA >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
7. In the TP Selection area, select the PF2G5 card and the VC number you want as cross connection end point.
8. Click the button "To TPB >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
9. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
10. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
11. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
598 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
45.8 How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection
1. Only in case of using a microshelf: Make sure that a LNQ622 and a Switch Fabric card are additionally installed in subrack 1.
2. In the tool bar, click the Cross Connection List button.
.
3. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC12 LC Layer.
5. The SDH and PDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).
6. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection start point.
7. Click the button "To TPA >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
8. In the TP Selection area, select the LNQ622M card or an IF2M / IF345M card respectively, and select the VC number you want as cross connection end point.
9. Click the button "To TPB >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
10. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 8 and 9 with TPB'.
11. The SDH card classification can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).
12. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
13. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
14. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 599
45.9 How to Add and Remove Path Protections
Adding a path protection:
1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, select an unprotected cross connection. Click Details...
3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection in the list. Click Modify...
4. In the Modify Cross Connection window, CC Type field, select the equivalent protected cross connection type.
5. In the TP Selection field, select the Card and the VC number you want as protection end point.
6. Click Add Protection.
Removing a path protection:
1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the cross connection. Click Details...
3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection in the list. Click Modify...
4. Click Remove Work. Path or Remove Prot Path.
5. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted. The selected cross connection remains connected, but becomes unprotected.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
600 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
45.10 How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button
2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprotected CC Type.
4. Select the VC Level.
5. Line West: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area. Click the button "To TPA >>". Select the TP Index, if applicable.
6. Line East: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area. Click the button "To TPB >>". Select the TP Index, if applicable.
7. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
8. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
9. Select the Unidirectional Tail End CC Type.
10. In the TP Selection area, select the same settings as in step 5. Click the button "To TPB >>". Select the TP Index, if applicable.
11. In the TP Selection area, select the same settings as in step 6. Click the button "To TPB' >>". Select the TP Index, if applicable.
12. Tributary: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area. Click the button "To TPA >>". Select the TP Index, if applicable.
13. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
14. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
15. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 601
45.11 How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button
2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprotected CC Type.
4. Select the VC Level.
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection start point
6. Click the button "To TPA >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection end point
8. Click the button "To TPB >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
9. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
10. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
11. Repeat the steps 5 to 10 depending on the required number of branches, with the same card A and TP a settings.
12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
602 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
45.12 How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button
2. In the Cross Connections List window, find one branch of the existing broadcast cross connection in the list.
3. Click Add...
4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprotected CC Type.
5. Select the same VC Level as the existing branches have.
6. Select the same card A and TP A as the existing branches have. Click To TP A >>. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
7. Select card B and TP B in the TP Selection field. Click To TP B >>. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
8. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
9. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
10. You can display a graphic of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic..
11. You can display a graphic of the TP relations of a selected cross connection by clicking Details... (select the list entry) -> Graphic Details ...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 603
45.13 How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button
2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the branch of the broadcast cross connection.
3. Click Delete.
4. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
5. If the following message is displayed, confirm it: "The VC4 Path Cross Connection is used in at least one combined Low Order Cross Connection". It is displayed when more than one lower order cross connections use a higher order cross connection. In this case, the higher order cross connection can only be deleted after having deleted the last lower order cross connection.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
604 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
45.14 How to Disconnect a Cross Connection
1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button
2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the cross connection to be disconnected.
3. Click Disconnect.
4. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
5. If the following message is displayed, confirm it: "The VC4 Path Cross Connection is used in at least one combined Low Order Cross Connection". It is displayed when more than one lower order cross connections use a higher order cross connection. In this case, the higher order cross connection can only be disconnected after having disconnected the last lower order cross connection.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 605
45.15 How to Configure DCC Cross Connections
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration...
3. In the MCF - DCC Config window, DCC List, right-click the DCC channel you want to configure.
4. On the submenu, click Configuration... to open the DCC Linkage Configuration window.
5. In this window, make the relevant settings.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 607
46 How to... (OH Cross Connections)
46.1 How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection Filter Options
Setting OH cross connection filter options:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross Connections...
3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, in the Filter field of either tab, use the selection fields to select the filtering features.
4. Click Set Filter to activate your filter settings. The table shows the available cross connections depending on your filter settings.
Clearing all OH cross connection filter settings:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross Connections...
3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, click Reset Filter. The selection field settings change to All.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
608 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
46.2 How to Create an OH Cross Connection
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross Connections...
3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, OH TP List tab, OH Termination Point list, select the entry you want as OH cross connection start point.
4. Click Set as TP A. The selected OH cross connection start point appears in the New OH Cross Connection area as TP A entry.
5. In the list, select the entry you want as OH cross connection end point.
6. Click Set as TP B. The selected OH Cross Connection end point appears in the New OH Cross Connection area as TP B entry. The corresponding OH CC Type is displayed.
7. Click Connect.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 609
46.3 How to Disconnect an OH Cross Connection
8. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
1. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross Connections...
2. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, OH CC List tab, select the OH cross connection you want to disconnect. The selected OH cross connection is displayed in detail in the OH CC Options area.
3. Click Disconnect.
4. Confirm the acknowledgement window.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 611
47 How to... (Protections)
47.1 How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line Protection
Creating a 1+1 MSP Protection:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the protecting SDH interface card symbol -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning... Select Linear 1+1 MSP (Protection) for the port(s) of the card. If the partner slot has been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, it will be configured automatically. Click Apply.
3. To create the protection, right-click the card symbol. On the submenu, click Protection.
4. In the Protection Management window , select the respective 1+1 MSP in the list, and click Create. The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).
5. In the port list, right-click the port symbol -> Subview...
6. In the 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow window, right-click the 1+1 MSP symbol -> Configuration.
7. In the 1+1 MSP Config window, MSP Activation field, select Activated and click Apply. The 1+1 MSP protection is active.
Deleting a 1+1 MSP Protection:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click one of the card symbols involved in the 1+1 MSP protection.
3. In the port list, right-click the port symbol -> Subview...
4. In the 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow window, right-click the 1+1 MSP symbol -> Configuration...
5. In the 1+1 MSP Config window, MSP Activation field, select De-activated and click Apply. Confirm the warning message.
6. In the top segment of the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols -> Protection...
7. In the Protection Management window , select the 1+1 MSP to be deleted and click Delete.
8. To remove the protection completely, click theinvolved protecting card symbol -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.
9. Click Apply.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
612 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
47.2 How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
Creating a 2F Shared Ring Protection (example IF2G5 card):
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, configure an IFS2G5, card in one of the involved slots and select the 2F Shared Ring provisioning mode. If the partner slot has been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, it will be configured automatically.
3. Right-click one of the involved card symbols and select Protection...
4. In the Protection Management list, select the 2F-SPRING and click Create. The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).
5. To activate the 2F Shared Ring Protection: In the port list, right-click the port symbol with Provisioning Mode "2F Shared Ring..." -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING -> Configuration...
6. Configure the ring topology with a minimum of 3 nodes. Each node ID should be unique.
7. In the 2F SPRING Configuration window, select "Activated" in the MSP Activation field.
8. Click Apply.
Deleting a 2F Shared Ring Protection:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the 2F SPRING Configuration window, set the MSP Activation to "De-activated".
3. In the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols -> Protection...
4. In the Protection Management window , select the 2F-SPRING to be deleted and click Delete.
5. To remove the protection completely, click the involved protecting card symbol -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.
6. Click Apply.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 613
47.3 How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection
Creating a 4F Shared Ring Protection:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, configure an IFS2G5 type, IFQ2G5 type or IFS10G type card in one of the involved slots and select the 4F Shared Ring Protection provisioning mode. If the 3 partner slots have been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, they will be configured automatically..
3. Right-click one of the involved card symbols and select Protection...
4. In the Protection Management list, select the 4F-SPRING and click Create. The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).
5. To activate the 4F Shared Ring Protection: In the port list, right-click the card symbol with ProvMode "4F Shared Ring ..." -> Subview... -> 4F-SPRING -> Configuration.
6. Configure the ring topology with a minimum of 3 nodes. Each node ID should be unique.
7. In the 4F SPRING Configuration window, MSP Activation field, select "Activated".
8. Click Apply.
Deleting a 4F Shared Ring Protection:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the 4F SPRING Configuration window, set the MSP Activation to "De-activated".
3. In the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols -> Protection...
4. In the Protection Management window , select the 4F-SPRING to be deleted and click Delete.
5. To remove the protection completely, click the involved protecting card symbol -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.
6. Click Apply.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
614 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
47.4 How to Configure the Squelch Table for 2F or 4F Rings
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click a 2.5-Gbit/s or 10-Gbit/s interface card symbol with created 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING protection.
3. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING -> Configuration... -> Squelch...
4. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Config window, Squelch Table area, you can assign the required Node Ids to each AU4.
5. Click Apply.
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 615
47.5 How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection
Creating an IF2M card protection:
1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, right-click the slot number symbol that offers IF2M card protection, and select the IF2M (CP) card.
2. Configure the required number of IF2M cards in the working card slots.
3. Right-click each IF2M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Add to Group.
4. Right-click the IF2M (CP) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Activate.
Deleting an IF2M card protection:
1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, you can remove any working IF2M card from the protection group by right-clicking the IF2M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Remove from Group.
2. To remove the complete protection group, right-click the IF2M (CP) card -> Card Protection -> Remove Group. Right-click the slot number symbol and select Empty or Empty-Auto.
Note: Avoiding IF2M Traffic loss during exchange of an IF2M card in the card protection scheme
Before plugging a "new/replaced" card into a working slot of an existing IF2M card protection scheme, this card needs to get "deactivated". This means the operator needs to remove this card from the required equipping. By this the card will be switched off. A switched-off card will not perform an optimistic startup, so this card cannot destroy traffic in a protection group. A deactivation can be done by one of the following methods:
a) If the card has to be transferred and was already plugged into an NE, the current slot shall be set to "empty" while the card is plugged. By this action the card gets switched off (i.e. deactivated).
b) If the card was not plugged into an NE before (coming from the spare), it shall be put into the respective working slot, it needs to get plugged into another free slot first, which is configured to "empty" (not "auto-empty" !!). Also by this the card gets switched off (i.e. deactivated).
If this is still not acceptable, then the only advise is, that the card shall not be put into the respective working slot. Instead of this it shall be plugged in the protection slot and have it started-up here. By this no traffic hits will occur because an optimistic startup in the protection slot will not cause any traffic hits.
If you have to do this, please make sure that there are no faults on the Protection group!
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
616 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 617
47.6 How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection
Creating an IF345M card protection:
5. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, right-click a slot number symbol that offers IF345M card protection, and select the IF345M (CP) card.
6. Configure the required IF345M card in the working card slot.
7. Right-click the IF345M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Add to Group.
8. Right-click the IF345M (CP) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Activate.
Deleting an IF345M card protection:
1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, you can remove the working IF345M card from the protection group by right-clicking the IF345M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Remove from Group.
2. To remove the complete protection group, right-click the IF345M (CP) card -> Card Protection -> Remove Group. Right-click the slot number symbol and select Empty or Empty-Auto.
3.
How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
618 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
47.7 How to Create / Delete an SF2G5, SF10G or SF160G Card Protection
Creating an SF2G5 card protection:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, configure an SF2G5 working card in a suitable odd numbered slot.
3. Configure an SF2G5 protecting card in a suitable even numbered slot.
No further configurations are necessary.
Creating an SF10G card protection:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, configure an SF10G working card in a suitable odd numbered slot.
3. Configure an SF10G protecting card in a suitable even numbered slot.
No further configurations are necessary.
Creating an SF160G card protection:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, configure an SF160G working card in a suitable slot (105 in the double-row subrack, 307 in the single-row subrack)
3. Configure an SF160G (CP) protecting card in a suitable slot (107 in the double-row subrack, 308 in the single-row subrack)
No further configurations are necessary.
Deleting an SF2G5, SF10G or SF160G card protection:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, change the protecting slot configuration to Empty or to a working card.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 619
47.8 How to Configure RPR Protection
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click the PF2G5 card symbol.
3. In the port list, click the PF2G5 symbol -> Subview...
4. In the GFP Group Traffic Flow window: Right-click the RPR Switch symbol -> Configuration...
5. In the RPR Switch Config window, L2 Switch folder, enter the RPR Node ID.
6. Enter the Protection Wait to Restore Time.
7. Enter the Protection Hold Off Time. The Hold Off Time makes sure that the L2 protection is not triggered by a MSP, SNCP, or RPR ring protection switching of other nodes.
8. Click Apply.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
620 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
47.9 How to Create an SNCP Protection
1. In the Module View, click the Cross Connection List button.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Connection Type: Bidirectional Protected or Unidirectional Head End or Unidirectional Tail End.
4. Select the VC Level (e.g. VC4).
TP A:
5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection start point.
6. Click the button "To TPA >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
TP B:
7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross connection end point.
8. Click the button "To TPB >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
TP B’:
9. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as TP B’ cross connection end point. (The TP B’ selections depend on the selected CC Type.)
10. Click the button "To TPB' >>" The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B' entry. Select the TP Index, if applicable.
11. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
12. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
13. Configure the second end point in the same way, starting from step #3.
14. Configure all intermediate points in the same way, starting from step #3.
15. Click Close. - The new cross connections are displayed in the Cross Connections List (depending on the Filter settings).
16. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 621
47.10 How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Existing LO Path
Preparing the multiplex structure for the protecting LO path:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the LO SF card symbol where the multiplex structure is to be prepared -> Subview...
3. In the Selection window, right-click the VC4 (Mux) symbol to be structured -> Subview...
4. In the Mux Structure window, right-click the VC4 symbol -> Configuration...
5. To use VC12 containers, select the Mux Config window, VC4 Mux Preparation tab, activate the "21 x TU-12" selection box of the related TUG #n. To use VC3 containers, no VC4 preparation is necessary on the LO sub-networks.
6. Click the Apply button.
7. If LO concatenation is to be used: In the context menus of the LO SF, select Configuration -> Concatenation... and create the required concatenated containers.
Creating the LO cross connection (protecting path):
1. In the Module View, click the Cross Connection List button.
2. In the Cross Connections List window, right-click the SNCP cross connection to be modified -> Details...
3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection and click Modify...
4. In the Modify Cross Connection window, CC Type area, select Bidirectional Protected.
5. In the TP Selection area, select the TP A to be protected. Click the button "To TPA >>"
6. In the TP Selection area, select the LO SF card (e.g. SF2G5). Select the LO container from the VC4 that has been structured before.
7. Click the button "To TPB' >>"
Creating the HO VC4 cross connection (protecting path):
1. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...
2. In the Add Cross Connection window, CC Type, select Bidirectional Protected.
3. Select the VC Level VC4.
4. In the TP Selection area, select the LO SF card and VC4 container that have been selected in the previous steps. Click the button "To TPA >>"
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
622 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
5. In the TP Selection area, select the SDH card and VC4 container to be used for the protecting path. Click the button "To TPB >>"
6. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.
7. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
8. Click Close. - The new cross connections are displayed in the Cross Connections List (depending on the Filter settings).
9. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 623
47.11 How to Set Up the Squelching Table
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click an interface card symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection or 4F-SPRING protection.
3. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview...
4. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Traffic Flow window, right-click the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING symbol -> Configuration...
5. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Config window, click Squelch...
6. In the Squelch Config window, assign the AU4 containers to their related NEs.
The following illustrations give an example:
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
624 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 625
47.12 How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link
1. Make sure that the internal LAN connection between the SURPASS hiT7070 SC or DC subrack and the extension shelf is connected.
2. Make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
3. In the Module View, insert an LNQ622M card. In the Card Equipment Config window, configure a port.
4. Right-click the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Extension Shelf... Configure a microshelf with a suitable subrack ID according to the table in the ITMN..
5. After the LNQ622M card is started up successfully, click the LNQ622M card symbol.
6. In the port list, right-click an port symbol -> Subview...
7. In the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window, right-click the Main ISTM4 symbol -> Configuration...
8. In the Main ISTM4 Config window, Connection Identifier field, select the corresponding ESM card of the microshelf. Click Apply.
9. In the upper part of the Module View, configure the second LNQ622M card.
10. In the Card Equipment Config window, active the Protection Port.
11. In the Port Provisioning window of the Protection card, select the entry Link Protection with the number according to the actual configuration.
12. In the port list, right-click an port symbol -> Subview...
13. In the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window, right-click the Main ISTM4 symbol -> Configuration...
14. In the Main ISTM4 Config window, Connection Identifier field, select the corresponding ESM protection card of the microshelf. Click Apply.
15. In the upper part of the Module View, right-click one of the LNQ622M cards symbols -> Protection...
16. Select the entry in the list. Click Create.
17. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview... Now the protection group is available.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 627
48 How to... (Concatenations)
48.1 How to Configure SDH Concatenations
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click the SDH interface card symbol.
3. In the port list, right-click the card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
4. In the Concatenation Config window, click the Add... button.
5. In the Add Concatenation Group window, select the Concatenation Type, Group ID and TPs, as applicable.
6. Click Apply.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
628 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
48.2 How to Configure ETH Concatenations
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click the ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...
3. In the Concatenation Config window, click the Template... button.
4. In the Concatenation Group Templates window, select one of the templates.
5. Click Apply.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 629
49 How to... (GFP Configurations)
49.1 How to Create / Delete VC Channels
Creating VC channels:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module view, right-click the PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
3. In the GFP Assignment window, GFP-SDH Assignment list, select the VC/VC Group for the GFP Group.
4. Click Apply.
Deleting VC channels:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module view, right-click the PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
3. In the GFP Assignment window, GFP-SDH Assignment list, select the GFP Group.
4. Set the VC/VC Group to Unassigned.
5. Click Apply Confirm the warning message.
Note:
Never delete a VC group as long as still a GFP group is assigned!
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
630 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
49.2 How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click an Ethernet or packet switch card symbol.-> Configuration -> Concatenation...
3. In the Concatenation Config window, click Template... and select one of the Concatenation Group Templates. Click Apply.
4. Close the Concatenation Config window.
5. In the context menu of the card, select Configuration -> GFP Assignment....
6. In the GFP Assignment window, ETH-GFP Assignment or LP Bandwidth Configuration area (as applicable), enter the bandwidth for each GFP Group.
7. Click Apply. Confirm the warning message.
8. In the GFP-SDH Assignment area, select the VC/VC Group assignment for each GFP group.
9. Click Apply.
10. Connect the SDH capacity with a path through the network.
11. Upload a VCDB for the NE.
Note:
To decommission ports, unassign them from the GFP group or disconnect a cross connection. If you unassign the GFP-SDH assignment, the device will be reset resulting in a short payload interruption of all channels served by the card.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 631
49.3 How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click an Ethernet or packet switch card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.
3. In the GFP Assignment window, ETH-GFP Assignment area, enter the bandwidth value for the concerned Ethernet port.
4. Click Apply. Confirm the warning message.
Note:
Check the sum of the bandwidths of all the Ethernet ports assigned to a GFP group. The sum must be less than the SDH capacity you plan to assign to the GFP group. Exceeding the SDH capacity may cause packet loss!
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
632 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
49.4 How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG
Creating a CUG:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...
3. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable).
4. Click Port Config.
5. In the Config window, select Multi2 CUG Mode.
6. Move at least one CUG ID from the Possible CUG ID values list to the CUG ID list.
7. Click Apply. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
8. Click CUG Management.
9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, click Add CUG to open the PF2G5 Add CUG window.
10. In this window, make the relevant settings.
Modifying a CUG:
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...
3. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable).
4. Click Port Config.
5. In the Config window, select Multi2 CUG Mode.
6. Move at least one CUG ID from the Possible CUG ID values list to the CUG ID list.
7. Click Apply. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
8. Click CUG Management.
9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, change the CUG settings.
10. Click Apply.
Deleting a CUG:
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 633
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...
3. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable)..
4. Click Port Config.
5. In the Config window, select Multi2 CUG Mode.
6. Move at least one CUG ID from the Possible CUG ID values list to the CUG ID list.
7. Click Apply. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
8. Click CUG Management.
9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, click Remove CUG.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
634 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
49.5 How to Specify the CUG Service Class
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...
3. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable).
4. Click Port Config...
5. In the Config window, select the CUG Mode and click Apply. Confirm the warning message.
6. Click the CUG Management button. (for configuration details, see Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards
7. In the CUG Management Config window, Service Class field, select Static Best Effort for fair access to the available bandwidth or Dynamic Prio 0 to Dynamic Prio 7: The service class of an incoming packet can be determined dynamically based upon the VLAN tag of the packet.
8. Click Apply.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 635
49.6 How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, click a PF2G5 card symbol.
3. In the port list, right-click the PF2G5 port symbol -> Subview....
4. In the GFP Group Traffic Flow window, right-click the RPR 3 o’clock or RPR 9 o’clock symbol -> Performance -> RPR Ring. The RPR Ring Performance window opens.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
636 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
49.7 How to Configure RPR Bandwidths
1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.
2. In the Module View, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...
3. In the GFP Assignment window, LP Bandwidth Configuration or LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable), enter the Ingress Bandwidth and / or Egress Bandwidth for each involved LP port.
4. Click Apply.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 637
50 How to... (Data and Software Handling)
50.1 How to Download VCDB Files
1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Config DB Management...
2. Set NE State to Idle.
3. In the Config DB Action field, select Set to Default Config DB.
4. Click Download... A standard Open dialog for VCDB file selection is opened.
5. Select the path and the file you want to download.
6. Click Open. The VCDB Download window appears.
7. Click Start to start the download. The state of the download process is displayed. After the download process has been concluded, the window closes automatically and the VCDB download is successfully completed.
8. If the download is not concluded successfully and an error message occurs, click Close to close the window. Check the reason for the error (e. g. open the Module View and check the window to verify which setting is missing). After removing the error, repeat the download process.
9. After successful download, the NE can be set to active. As a precondition for this, the NE name must not be the default name. If necessary, change the NE name via the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Network Element...
10. In the Config DB Management window, select NE Stare Active and click Apply. The NE will be initialized automatically.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
638 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
50.2 How to Upload VCDB Files
1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Config DB Management...
2. In the Config DB Management window, click Upload... A standard File Save As dialog for VCDB file selection is opened.
3. Select the path and enter the file you want to upload.
4. Click Save. The VCDB Upload window appears.
5. Click Start to start the upload. The state of the download process is displayed. After the upload process has been concluded, the window closes automatically and the VCDB upload is successfully completed..
Note:
During VCDB upload, all empty slots will be set to Empty-Auto provisioning state, even if configured to Empty before.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 639
51 How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules)
51.1 How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH
The MMC must be exchanged in case of an Flash SW alarm at the SCOH card, see SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance The replacement of a defect MMC by a new one (with no data), must be done with an operating SCOH. The current NE-VCDB is being copied automatically to the new MMC. The password data, license and subrack label are not automatically transformed to the MMC. To adopt these data to the new MMC, they must be inserted via the LCT again. If an SCOH is replaced, the old MMC (placed at the front panel of the SCOH) must be adopted before the new SCOH is inserted. The MMC data belongs always to the subrack! Passwords, license and subrack label are set to default after an SCOH reboot. Also the NE-VCDB is being lost after a Power Off (pulling out the SCOH).
Note:
The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that battery.
For detailed flow charts, see:
How to Change a Defective SCOH
How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH
How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
640 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
51.2 How to Change a Defective SCOH
For general notes, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH.
If you replace a defective SCOH, you must follow the below flow chart.
Note:
The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that battery.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 641
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
642 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Retrieve NSAP and VCDB
Flow Chart Symbol Legend
How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH
How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 643
51.3 How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC
For general notes, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH.
If you replace a defective SCOH inclusive a defective MMC, you must follow the below flow chart.
Note:
The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that battery.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
644 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 645
Retrieve NSAP and VCDB
Flow Chart Symbol Legend
How to Change a Defective SCOH
How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
646 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
51.4 How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH
For general notes, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH.
If you replace a defective MMC on a working SCOH, you must follow the below flow chart.
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 647
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
648 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
Flow Chart Symbol Legend
How to Change a Defective SCOH
How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 649
51.5 Retrieve NSAP and VCDB
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
650 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
51.6 Flow Chart Symbol Legend
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 651
52 Index
1
1 1 MSP Configuration......................... 157
1 N MSP Alarms..................................... 80
1 N MSP Configuration ........................ 159
1 N MSP Extension.............................. 162
1 N MSP Protected Traffic Flow............. 99
1 N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow ...... 100
2
2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration......................................................... 175
2F / 4F SPRING Topology Configuration......................................................... 173
2F SPRING Configuration.................... 167
2F-SPRING Extra Configuration .......... 169
4
4F SPRING Configuration.................... 171
4F SPRING Traffic Flow ...................... 117
A
Abbreviations ........................................... 1
About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software ..... 11
Access Information .............................. 459
Active APS Record .............................. 467
Actual Equipping Information ................. 32
Add 1 N MSP ....................................... 161
Add Concatenation Group ................... 206
Add Cross Connection ......................... 145
Add Extension Link Protection ............. 189
Add VLAN ID Assignment.................... 223
Add Working Ports ............................... 163
Adding a Permanent Entry................... 458
Adding a Reachable DCC Address...... 269
Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address 276
Alarm List ............................................... 65
APS Compatibility Information ............. 468
ASIC Data Information ......................... 324
Assigned VLAN IDs Information........... 222
AU4 PJE Performance ......................... 337
AU4/VC4 Configuration........................ 127
B
Booster Cards Label Information ........... 41
C
Card Configuration for ETH Cards ......... 52
Card Configuration for SDH Cards......... 50
Card Equipment Configuration............... 43
Card Inventory Summary ....................... 33
Change Password to Default ............... 461
CLU Card Configuration......................... 45
Communication Alarm Feature Table .... 73
Communication Alarms .......................... 71
Concatenated VC4 Configuration ........ 199
Concatenation Configuration................ 203
Concatenation Details .......................... 205
Concatenation Group Templates ......... 207
Copy Card Data.................................... 327
Copy Data ............................................ 325
Copy to Permanent MACs ................... 333
Cross Connection Details..................... 147
Cross Connection Graphic Details ....... 149
Cross Connections Graphic ................. 148
Cross Connections List ........................ 141
D
Date / Time Configuration ...................... 13
DB Download Dialog ............................ 329
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
652 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
DB Management Configuration............ 328
DB Upload Dialog................................. 330
Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections..................................... 271
Delta Software Download .................... 466
E
E12 Configuration ................................ 135
E12 or E3 Traffic Flow ........................... 93
E3 Configuration .................................. 137
E3/VC3 Alarms....................................... 78
Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance......................................................... 473
EOW Configurations .............................. 24
Equipment Alarms.................................. 69
ESM-CORE Card Configuration ............ 30
ETH Configuration ............................... 133
ETH Traffic Flow .................................... 92
Ethernet Packet Performance.............. 335
Extension Link Protection Configuration......................................................... 188
Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow. 187
Extension Shelf Configuration................ 29
F
Fan Unit Fault Clearance ..................... 481
Flow Chart Symbol Legend.................. 556
G
GFP Assignment .......................... 219; 235
GFP Frames Performance................... 369
GFP Group Subview ............................ 234
GFP Group Traffic Flow ....................... 233
H
How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection ............................ 510
How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Existing LO Path .............................. 528
How to Add and Remove Path Protections......................................................... 507
How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups......................................................... 536
How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH ................................ 552
How to Change a Defective SCOH...... 546
How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC .............. 549
How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards......................................................... 485
How to Configure DCC Cross Connections......................................................... 513
How to Configure ETH Cards and Debugging........................................ 489
How to Configure ETH Concatenations534
How to Configure NSAP Settings......... 483
How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports 486
How to Configure RPR Bandwidths ..... 542
How to Configure RPR Protection........ 526
How to Configure SDH Concatenations......................................................... 533
How to Configure the Squelch Table for 2F or 4F Rings ...................................... 522
How to Configure the Subrack Equipping......................................................... 484
How to Configure the Timing................ 491
How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling .......................................... 495
How to Configure TIF Ports.................. 497
How to Copy Alarm Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object............................................... 487
How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object ............................... 488
How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line Protection......................................... 519
How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection......................................... 520
How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection......................................... 521
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 653
How to Create / Delete an 1+1 MSP Line Protections....................................... 519
How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection......................................... 523
How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection......................................... 524
How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 SF10G or SF160G Card Protection ............. 525
How to Create / Delete VC Channels .. 535
How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG538
How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection....................................... 509
How to Create a Cross Connection ..... 500
How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary Ethernet Port to an RPR.. 505
How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection....................................... 508
How to Create an OH Cross Connection......................................................... 516
How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12/VC3 Cross Connection ............................ 504
How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection....................................... 506
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection....................................... 501
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection....................................... 502
How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection....................................... 503
How to Create an SNCP Protection..... 527
How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection....................................... 511
How to Disconnect a Cross Connection......................................................... 512
How to Disconnect an OH Cross Connection....................................... 517
How to Download VCDB Files ............. 543
How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic .......................... 541
How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH .............................................. 545
How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Filter Options.................................... 499
How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection Filter Options.................................... 515
How to Set Sync Priorities.................... 493
How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel............................................ 537
How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link......................................................... 532
How to Set Up the Squelching Table ... 530
How to Specify the CUG Service Class540
How to Suppress Alarms...................... 496
How to Upload VCDB Files .................. 544
I
IF2M / IF345M Card Configuration......... 49
IF2M Card Label Information ................. 39
IF2M Port Configuration ....................... 122
IFO155M Card Label Information........... 35
IFO155ME Card Label Information ........ 37
IFS40G-MX Card Configuration ............. 51
IFS40G-MX Card Label Information....... 40
IFSO* Cards Configuration .................... 54
IP Addresses Configuration ................. 285
IP Addresses Entry Modify................... 287
IP Static Routing Configuration ............ 288
IP Static Routing Entry Add.................. 290
IP Static Routing Entry Modify ............. 291
ISTM 4 Configuration ........................... 190
L
LCAS State Configuration .................... 243
LCAS VC12-nv Configuration .............. 246
LCAS VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection 248
LCAS VC3-nv Configuration ................ 245
LCAS VC3-nv Virtual VC3 Selection.... 247
LCAS Virtual VC12 Configuration ........ 251
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
654 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
LCAS Virtual VC3 Configuration .......... 249
Log Records Attribute .......................... 332
M
MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information......................................................... 261
MCF CLNS Performance ..................... 263
MCF DCC Configuration ...................... 265
MCF DCC Linkage Configuration ........ 266
MCF DCC Linkage Performance ......... 268
MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration .. 273
MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance ... 275
MCF IP over OSI Configuration ........... 279
MCF OSI over IP Adding a Reachable Address............................................ 283
MCF OSI over IP Modifying a Reachable Address............................................ 284
MCF OSI over IP Configuration ........... 280
MCF OSI over IP Performance ............ 282
MCF Stack Parameters Configuration . 256
MCF Transport Connection Information......................................................... 258
MCF Transport Connection Performance......................................................... 259
Message Communication Functions.... 255
Mixed Mode GFP Assignment ............. 219
Modify Cross Connection..................... 150
Modify LCAS Concatenation Group..... 244
Modify Template................................... 208
Modifying a Reachable DCC Address . 270
Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address......................................................... 278
Module View Double-row Subrack........ 16
Module View Single-row Subrack ......... 19
MSTTP Far End Performance ............. 345
MSTTP Near End Performance ........... 342
N
NE and Subrack Fault Clearance......... 469
NE Logs Information ............................ 331
NEAP Configuration ............................... 68
Neighbour Ports ..................................... 25
Network Element Configuration ............. 14
NewTopic 1 .......................................... 489
NewTopic 2 ............................................ 97
NMS NE Password............................... 460
O
Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance 470
Option Settings....................................... 22
OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration . 299
OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add....... 301
OSPF Area Metric Configuration.......... 298
OSPF Areas Configuration................... 295
OSPF Areas Entry Modify .................... 297
OSPF Configuration ............................. 293
OSPF External LSDB Entry Details ..... 318
OSPF External LSDB Information........ 317
OSPF Interface Metric Configuration ... 306
OSPF Interfaces Configuration ............ 302
OSPF Interfaces Entry Add.................. 304
OSPF LSDB Entry Details.................... 316
OSPF LSDB Information ...................... 315
OSPF Neighbours Information ............. 310
OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration . 307
OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add....... 309
OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details314
OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information.. 312
Overhead Cross Connections .............. 151
P
PDH Cards Label Information ................ 36
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619 655
PF2G5 Add CUG ................................. 241
PF2G5 GFP Assignment ..................... 237
PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration ................................... 239
PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration ................................... 240
PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration ................................... 238
Plain Cross Connections List ............... 143
Port Configuration ................................ 121
Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards.... 122
Port Provisioning Configuration ............. 55
Possible Equipping Information ............. 31
Protection Management....................... 153
R
Retrieve NSAP and VCDB................... 555
RPR Feeder Performance ................... 455
RPR Ring Performance ....................... 453
RPR Switch Configuration ................... 451
RSTTP Near End Performance ........... 348
S
SCOH NE and Subrack Fault Clearance......................................................... 478
SCOH and CLU Card Fault Clearance 478
SCOH Card Configuration ..................... 44
SCOH Card Label Information ............... 38
Script Configuration ............................... 26
SDH GFP Assignment ......................... 242
SDH or Ethernet Interfaces Card Label Information......................................... 35
SF160G Card Configuration .................. 46
SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration.... 47
SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack....................................... 48
Software Download.............................. 465
Software Management ......................... 463
STM-1 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow ................ 107
STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow............... 103
STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow ...... 101
STM-1 Traffic Flow................................. 85
STM-16 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow .............. 109
STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow.................................................. 105
STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow112
STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection................... 88
STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING......................................................... 177
STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING Extra................................................. 178
STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection 4F-SPRING......................................................... 179
STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection Prepared 2F-SPRING ........................................... 176
STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow.................................................. 111
STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow ...................................... 113
STM-16 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow .... 113
STM-16 Traffic Flow............................... 89
STM-4 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow ................ 108
STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow............... 104
STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection..................... 86
STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow ...... 102
STM-4 Traffic Flow................................. 87
STM-64 1 1 MSP Traffic Flow .............. 110
STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow.................................................. 106
STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow115
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection................... 90
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING......................................................... 181
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation SURPASS hiT 7070 3.2
656 A42022-L5957-C255-1-7619
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection 2F-SPRING Extra ................................................ 182
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection 4F-SPRING......................................................... 183
STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection Prepared 2F-SPRING ........................................... 180
STM-64 Gauge Performance............... 339
STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow ................................................. 114
STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow ...................................... 116
STM-64 Traffic Flow............................... 91
STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration ........... 155
STM-N Configuration ........................... 124
Subrack Data ....................................... 323
SURPASS hiT 7070 Features................ 10
Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance .... 476
Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration ..................................... 57
T
T0 Configuration..................................... 60
T1 Configuration..................................... 61
T3 / T4 Config ........................................ 62
TCA List ................................................. 83
TCP Connections Entry Details ........... 321
TCP Connections Information.............. 319
TIF Configuration ................................... 82
TIF Fault Clearance ............................. 480
U
Using this Help System............................ 9
V
VC12 Far End Performance................. 366
VC12 Near End Performance .............. 363
VC12-2v Configuration......................... 201
VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection .......... 193
VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP.............. 129
VC3/VC12 Configuration TTP.............. 131
VC3-2v Configuration........................... 202
VC4 Configuration .................................. 94
VC4 Multiplex Structure ....................... 139
VC4 Selection......................................... 96
VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards......................................................... 119
VC4 Static Multiplex Traffic Flow ........... 97
VCCTP Far End Performance.............. 354
VCCTP Near End Performance ........... 351
VCTTP Far End Performance .............. 360
VCTTP Near End Performance............ 357
Virtual 16x VC4 Selection .................... 197
Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection .............. 225
Virtual 2x VC3 Selection ...................... 194
Virtual 4x VC4 Selection ...................... 195
Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection ............ 198
Virtual 7x VC4 Selection ...................... 196
Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration............. 230
Virtual VC12 Configuration................... 226
Virtual VC3/VC4 Configuration............. 228
VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment .......... 217
VLAN C Traffic Flow..................... 214; 217
VLAN Functionality............................... 211
VLAN Selection .................................... 216
W
Working STM-1 Selection .................... 164
Working VC4 Selection ........................ 165